Symbol Technologies Ds 3408 Users Manual

DS 3408 to the manual 181a3b72-7353-40e9-b866-b8e4fd12c950

2015-02-02

: Symbol-Technologies Symbol-Technologies-Ds-3408-Users-Manual-449040 symbol-technologies-ds-3408-users-manual-449040 symbol-technologies pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 396 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

DS 3408
Product Reference Guide
DS 3408
Product Reference Guide
72-68456-01
Revision A
July 2004
© 2004 by Symbol Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means, without permission in writing from
Symbol. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material
in this manual is subject to change without notice.
The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on a licensed basis. Symbol grants
to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except
as noted below, such license may not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Symbol. No
right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user shall not modify, merge, or
incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a
licensed program in a network without written permission from Symbol. The user agrees to maintain Symbol’s copyright notice on the licensed
programs delivered hereunder and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part. The user agrees not to decompile,
disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof.
Symbol reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design.
Symbol does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any product, circuit, or application
described herein.
No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Symbol Technologies, Inc., intellectual property rights.
An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits and subsystems contained in Symbol products.
Symbol, Spectrum One and Spectrum24 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies, Inc. Other product names mentioned in this manual
may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.
Symbol Technologies, Inc.
One Symbol Plaza
Holtsville, New York 11742-1300
http://www.symbol.com
Contents
About This Guide
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Chapter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Related Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Symbol Support Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Chapter 1. Getting Started
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Setting Up the Digital Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Installing the Interface Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Removing the Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Connecting a Synapse Cable Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Connecting Power (if required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Configuring the Digital Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Chapter 2. Scanning
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Beeper Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Scanning with the Digital Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
DS 3408 Product Reference Guideiv
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Scanning in Hands-Free Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Near Focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Far Focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Toggled Focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Chapter 3. Maintenance and Technical Specifications
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Digital Scanner Signal Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chapter 4. User Preferences
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
User Preferences Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
User Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Set Default Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Parameter Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Beeper Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Beeper Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Time Delay to Low Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Trigger Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Decode Session Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Beep After Good Decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Scanstand Session Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Chapter 5. Decoding Preferences
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Decoding Preferences Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Decoding Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Focus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Decoding Illumination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Decode Aiming Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Chapter 6. Keyboard Wedge Interface
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Contents v
Keyboard Wedge Host Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Intra-Keystroke Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Caps Lock On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Caps Lock Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Convert Wedge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
FN1 Substitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Send Make and Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Keyboard Maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Chapter 7. RS-232 Interface
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Connecting an RS-232 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
RS-232 Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
RS-232 Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
RS-232 Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Parity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Stop Bit Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Data Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Check Receive Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Hardware Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Hardware Handshaking (continued). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Software Handshaking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Host Serial Response Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
RTS Line State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Beep on <BEL> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Intercharacter Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
ASCII Character Set for RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Chapter 8. USB Interface
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Connecting a USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
USB Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
USB Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
USB Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
USB Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
USB CAPS Lock Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
USB Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
DS 3408 Product Reference Guidevi
Emulate Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Simulated Caps Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Convert Case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
ASCII Character Set for USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Chapter 9. IBM 468X/469X Interface
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
IBM Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Port Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Convert Unknown to Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Chapter 10. Wand Emulation Interface
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Connecting Using Wand Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Wand Emulation Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Wand Emulation Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Leading Margin (Quiet Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Chapter 11. Scanner Emulation Interface
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Connecting Using Scanner Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-4
Scanner Emulation Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
Scanner Emulation Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
Beep Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
Parameter Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
Convert Newer Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
Module Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Transmission Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Leading Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11
Check For Decode LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Chapter 12. 123 Scan
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Communication with 123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Contents vii
123Scan Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Chapter 13. Symbologies
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Symbology Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
UPC/EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
Enable/Disable UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
Enable/Disable UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
Enable/Disable UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Enable/Disable EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Enable/Disable EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-13
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-16
UPC-A Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-16
UPC-E Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-17
UPC-E1 Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-18
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-18
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-19
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-19
UCC Coupon Extended Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20
Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20
Enable/Disable Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20
Enable/Disable UCC/EAN-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-21
Enable/Disable ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-21
Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-22
Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-22
Convert Code 39 to Code 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-23
Code 32 Prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-23
Set Lengths for Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-24
Code 39 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-25
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-26
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-26
Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-27
Code 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-29
Enable/Disable Code 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-29
Set Lengths for Code 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-30
Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-31
Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-31
Set Lengths for Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-32
Code 11 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-33
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-34
DS 3408 Product Reference Guideviii
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-34
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-34
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-35
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-36
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-37
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-37
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-38
Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-38
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-38
Codabar (NW - 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-39
Enable/Disable Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-39
Set Lengths for Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-40
CLSI Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-41
NOTIS Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-41
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-42
Enable/Disable MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-42
Set Lengths for MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-42
MSI Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-43
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-44
MSI Check Digit Algorithm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-44
Postal Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-45
US Postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-45
US Planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-45
UK Postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-46
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-46
Japan Postal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-47
Australian Postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-47
Dutch Postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-48
Transmit US Postal Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-48
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-49
RSS-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-49
RSS Limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-49
RSS Expanded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-50
Convert RSS to UPC/EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-50
Composite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-51
Composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-51
Composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-51
Composite TLC-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-52
UPC Composite Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-53
Composite Beep Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-54
UCC/EAN Code 128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-54
2D Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-55
Enable/Disable PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-55
Enable/Disable MicroPDF417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-55
Code 128 Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-56
Data Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-57
Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-57
QR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-58
Contents ix
Redundancy Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-59
Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-61
Intercharacter Gap Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-62
Report Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-62
Macro PDF Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-63
Flush Macro Buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-63
Abort Macro PDF Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-63
Chapter 14. Miscellaneous Scanner Options
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Transmit Code ID Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Prefix/Suffix Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Scan Data Transmission Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7
FN1 Substitution Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8
Transmit “No Read” Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-9
Synapse Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-10
Chapter 15. Advanced Data Formatting
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3
Using ADF Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-4
ADF Bar Code Menu Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-4
Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Alternate Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
Default Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-7
Special Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Pause Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Begin New Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Save Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-9
Quit Entering Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-9
Disable Rule Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-10
Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11
Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11
Code Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-17
Message Containing A Specific Data String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-22
Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-27
Send Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-27
Setup Field(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-30
Modify Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-36
Pad Data with Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-37
DS 3408 Product Reference Guidex
Pad Data with Zeros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-41
Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-46
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-46
Send Right Control Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-82
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-83
Turn On/Off Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-88
Alphanumeric Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-90
Appendix A. Standard Default Parameters
Appendix B. Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
AIM Code Identifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Appendix C. Sample Bar Codes
Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
UPC/EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
UPC-A, 100 %. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
EAN-13, 100 %. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
RSS 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Data Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
QR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
US Postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
UK Postal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Appendix D. Numeric Bar Codes
Numeric Bar Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Appendix E. ASCII Character Sets
Glossary
Index
About This Guide
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Chapter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Related Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Symbol Support Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
DS 3408 Product Reference Guidexii
xiii
Introduction
The DS 3408 Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up, operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting the
DS 3408 Standard Range and DS 3408 High Density digital scanners.
Chapter Descriptions
•Chapter 1, Getting Started provides a product overview, unpacking instructions, and cable connection information.
•Chapter 2, Scanning describes parts of the digital scanner, beeper and LED definitions, and how to use the digital scanner
in hand-held and hands-free modes.
•Chapter 3, Maintenance and Technical Specifications provides information on how to care for the digital scanner,
troubleshooting, and technical specifications.
•Chapter 4, User Preferences provides programming bar codes for selecting user preference features for the digital scanner.
•Chapter 5, Decoding Preferences provides programming bar codes for selecting digital scanner preference features.
•Chapter 6, Keyboard Wedge Interface describes how to set up a Keyboard Wedge interface with the digital scanner.
•Chapter 7, RS-232 Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with an RS-232 host, such as point-of-sale devices,
host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port.
•Chapter 8, USB Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with a USB host.
•Chapter 9, IBM 468X/469X Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with IBM 468X/469X POS systems.
•Chapter 10, Wand Emulation Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with a Wand Emulation host when Wand
Emulation communication is needed.
•Chapter 11, Scanner Emulation Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with an Undecoded Scanner Emulation
host.
•Chapter 12, 123 Scan describes the 123Scan PC-based scanner configuration tool, and provides the bar code to scan to
communicate with the 123Scan program.
•Chapter 13, Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides the programming bar codes necessary for selecting
these features for the digital scanner.
•Chapter 14, Miscellaneous Scanner Options includes commonly used bar codes to customize how data is transmitted to the
host device.
•Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) describes how to customize scanned data before transmitting to the host.
•Chapter A, Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous digital scanner defaults.
•Chapter B, Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers, ASCII character conversions, and keyboard
maps.
•Chapter C, Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes.
•Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring specific numeric values.
•Chapter E, ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables.
Notational Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
• Bullets (•) indicate:
• action items
• lists of alternatives
• lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential.
• Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists.
DS 3408 Product Reference Guidexiv
• Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) are used to denote default parameter settings.
Related Publications
The LS/DS 3408 Quick Start Guide, p/n 72-67131-xx, provides general information for getting started with the digital scanner, and
includes basic set up and operation instructions.
For the latest versions of the Quick Start Guide and Product Reference Guide go to: http://www.symbol.com/manuals.
Service Information
If you have a problem with your equipment, contact the Symbol Support Center for your region. See page xvi for contact information.
Before calling, have the model number, serial number, and several of your bar code symbols at hand.
Call the Support Center from a phone near the scanning equipment so that the service person can try to talk you through your problem.
If the equipment is found to be working properly and the problem is symbol readability, the Support Center will request samples of
your bar codes for analysis at our plant.
If your problem cannot be solved over the phone, you may need to return your equipment for servicing. If that is necessary, you will
be given specific directions.
Symbol Technologies is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping
container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty. If the original shipping
container was not kept, contact Symbol to have another sent to you.
Symbol Support Center
For service information, warranty information, or technical assistance contact or call the Symbol Support Center in:
United States
Symbol Technologies, Inc.
One Symbol Plaza
Holtsville, New York 11742-1300
1-800-653-5350
Canada
Symbol Technologies Canada, Inc.
2540 Matheson Boulevard East
Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L4W 4Z2
905-629-7226
United Kingdom
Symbol Technologies
Symbol Place
Winnersh Triangle, Berkshire RG41 5TP
United Kingdom
0800 328 2424 (Inside UK)
+44 118 945 7529 (Outside UK)
Asia/Pacific
Symbol Technologies Asia, Inc (Singapore Branch)
230 Victoria Street #05-07/09
Bugis Junction Office Tower
Singapore 188024
Tel : +65-6796-9600
Fax : +65-6337-6488
*Baud Rate 9600 Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
Note
xv
Australia
Symbol Technologies Pty. Ltd.
432 St. Kilda Road
Melbourne, Victoria 3004
1-800-672-906 (Inside Australia)
+61-3-9866-6044 (Outside Australia)
Austria/Österreich
Symbol Technologies Austria GmbH
Prinz-Eugen Strasse 70 / 2.Haus
1040 Vienna, Austria
01-5055794-0 (Inside Austria)
+43-1-5055794-0 (Outside Austria)
Denmark/Danmark
Symbol Technologies AS
Dr. Neergaardsvej 3
2970 Hørsholm
7020-1718 (Inside Denmark)
+45-7020-1718 (Outside Denmark)
Europe/Mid-East Distributor Operations
Contact your local distributor or call
+44 118 945 7360
Finland/Suomi
Oy Symbol Technologies
Kaupintie 8 A 6
FIN-00440 Helsinki, Finland
9 5407 580 (Inside Finland)
+358 9 5407 580 (Outside Finland)
France
Symbol Technologies France
Centre d'Affaire d'Antony
3 Rue de la Renaissance
92184 Antony Cedex, France
01-40-96-52-21 (Inside France)
+33-1-40-96-52-50 (Outside France)
Germany/Deutschland
Symbol Technologies GmbH
Waldstrasse 66
D-63128 Dietzenbach, Germany
6074-49020 (Inside Germany)
+49-6074-49020 (Outside Germany)
Italy/Italia
Symbol Technologies Italia S.R.L.
Via Cristoforo Columbo, 49
20090 Trezzano S/N Navigilo
Milano, Italy
2-484441 (Inside Italy)
+39-02-484441 (Outside Italy)
Latin America Sales Support
2730 University Dr.
Coral Springs, FL 33065 USA
1-800-347-0178 (Inside United States)
+1-954-255-2610 (Outside United States)
954-340-9454 (Fax)
Mexico/México
Symbol Technologies Mexico Ltd.
Torre Picasso
Boulevard Manuel Avila Camacho No 88
Lomas de Chapultepec CP 11000
Mexico City, DF, Mexico
5-520-1835 (Inside Mexico)
+52-5-520-1835 (Outside Mexico)
Netherlands/Nederland
Symbol Technologies
Kerkplein 2, 7051 CX
Postbus 24 7050 AA
Varsseveld, Netherlands
315-271700 (Inside Netherlands)
+31-315-271700 (Outside Netherlands)
Norway/Norge
Symbol’s registered and mailing address:
Symbol Technologies Norway
Hoybratenveien 35 C
N-1055 OSLO, Norway
Symbol’s repair depot and shipping address:
Symbol Technologies Norway
Enebakkveien 123
N-0680 OSLO, Norway
+47 2232 4375
DS 3408 Product Reference Guidexvi
If you purchased your Symbol product from a Symbol Business Partner, contact that Business Partner for service.
South Africa
Symbol Technologies Africa Inc.
Block B2
Rutherford Estate
1 Scott Street
Waverly 2090 Johannesburg
Republic of South Africa
11-809 5311 (Inside South Africa)
+27-11-809 5311 (Outside South Africa)
Spain/España
Symbol Technologies S.L.
Avenida de Bruselas, 22
Edificio Sauce
Alcobendas, Madrid 28108
Spain
91 324 40 00 (Inside Spain)
+34 91 324 40 00 (Outside Spain)
Fax: +34.91.324.4010
Sweden/Sverige
“Letter” address:
Symbol Technologies AB
Box 1354
S-171 26 SOLNA
Sweden
Visit/shipping address:
Symbol Technologies AB
Solna Strandväg 78
S-171 54 SOLNA
Sweden
Switchboard: 08 445 29 00 (domestic)
Call Center: +46 8 445 29 29 (international)
Support E-Mail: Sweden.Support@se.symbol.com
Getting Started
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Setting Up the Digital Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Installing the Interface Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Removing the Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Connecting a Synapse Cable Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Connecting Power (if required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Configuring the Digital Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide1-2
Getting Started 1-3
Introduction
The digital scanner combines superior 1D and 2D omnidirectional bar code scanning and advanced ergonomics to provide the best
value in a digital scanner. Whether in hand-held mode or hands-free mode in a stand, the digital scanner ensures comfort and ease
of use for extended periods of time.
Figure 1-1. DS 3408 Digital Scanner
The digital scanner supports:
• Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. This interface supports the following
international keyboards (for Windows® environment): North America, German, French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian,
Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese.
• Standard RS-232 connection to a host. Scan bar code menus to set up proper communication of the digital scanner with the
host.
• USB connection to a host. The digital scanner autodetects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface type. Select
other USB interface types by scanning programming bar code menus.This interface supports the following international
keyboards (for Windows® environment): North America, German, French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK
English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese.
• Connection to IBM® 468X/469X hosts. Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the digital scanner with the IBM
terminal.
• Wand Emulation connection to a host. The digital scanner is connected to a portable data terminal, a controller, or host which
collects the data as wand data and decodes it.
• Scanner Emulation connection to a host. The digital scanner is connected to a portable data terminal, a controller which
collects the data and interprets it for the host.
• Synapse capability which allows connection to a wide variety of host systems using a Synapse and Synapse adapter cable.
The digital scanner autodetects the host.
• Configuration via 123Scan.
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide1-4
Unpacking
Remove the digital scanner from its packing and inspect it for damage. If the digital scanner was damaged in transit, call the Symbol
Support Center at one of the telephone numbers listed on page xiv. KEEP THE PACKING. It is the approved shipping container; use
this to return the equipment for servicing.
Setting Up the Digital Scanner
Installing the Interface Cable
1. Loosen the two screws on the cable clamp at the bottom of the digital scanner and gently pull the clamp away from the
bottom of the digital scanner.
Figure 1-2. Loosening Screws on Bottom of Digital Scanner
2. Open the clamp and plug the interface cable modular connector into the cable interface port on the bottom of the digital
scanner handle.
Figure 1-3. Connecting the Interface Cable
3. Gently tug the cable to ensure the connector is properly secured.
Getting Started 1-5
4. Close the clamp, push it back into place and tighten the screws on the clamp to secure the cable into the bottom of the digital
scanner.
Figure 1-4. Securing the Clamp
5. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (see the specific host chapter for information on host connections).
Different cables are required for different hosts. The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples
only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the digital scanner
remain the same.
Removing the Interface Cable
1. Loosen the two screws on the cable clamp at the bottom of the digital scanner and gently pull the clamp away from the
bottom of the digital scanner.
2. Open the clamp and unplug the interface cable modular connector from the cable interface port on the bottom of the digital
scanner handle. Carefully slide out the cable.
3. Follow the steps for Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4 to connect a new cable.
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide1-6
Connecting a Synapse Cable Interface
Refer to the Synapse Interface Guide provided with the Synapse cable for detailed setup instructions.
Symbol’s Synapse Smart Cables enable interfacing to a variety of hosts. The Synapse cable has built-in intelligence to detect that
host.
Figure 1-5. Synapse Cable Connection
1. Plug the Synapse adapter cable (p/n 25-32463-xx) into the bottom of the digital scanner, as described in Installing the
Interface Cable on page 1-4.
2. Align the ‘S’ on the Synapse adapter cable with the ‘S’ on the Synapse Smart Cable and plug the cable in.
3. Connect the other end of the Synapse Smart Cable to the host.
Connecting Power (if required)
If the host does not provide power to the digital scanner, connect an external power supply to the digital scanner:
1. Connect the interface cable to the bottom of the digital scanner, as described in Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4.
2. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (refer to the host manual to locate the correct port).
3. Plug the power supply into the power jack on the interface cable. Plug the other end of the power supply into an AC outlet.
Configuring the Digital Scanner
To configure the digital scanner, use the bar codes included in this manual, or the 123Scan configuration program.
See Chapter 4, User Preferences for information about programming the digital scanner using bar code menus. Also see each host-
specific chapter to set up connection to a specific host type.
See Chapter 12, 123 Scan to configure the digital scanner using this configuration program. A help file is available in the program.
Note
Synapse Adapter Cable
To digital scanner
Synapse Smart Cable
To host
Scanning
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Beeper Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Scanning with the Digital Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Scanning in Hands-Free Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Decode Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Near Focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Far Focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Toggled Focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide2-2
Scanning 2-3
Introduction
This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, techniques involved in scanning bar codes, general instructions and tips about
scanning, and decode zone diagrams.
Figure 2-1. Parts
Scan Trigger
Scan Window
LED
Indicators
Tether Plate
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide2-4
Beeper Definitions
The digital scanner issues different beep sequences and patterns to indicate status. Table 2-1 defines beep sequences that occur
during both normal scanning and while programming the digital scanner.
Table 2-1. Beeper Definitions
Beeper Sequence Indication
Standard Use
Short low/short medium/short high beep
sequence
Power up.
1 short high beep A bar code symbol was decoded (if decode beeper is enabled).
4 long low beeps A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The data is ignored. This occurs if the digital scanner is not
properly configured. Check option setting.
5 low beeps Conversion or format error.
Lo/hi/lo beeps ADF transmit error. See Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting.
Short high/short high/short high/long low
beep sequence
RS-232 receive error.
Parameter Menu Scanning
Short high beep Correct entry scanned or correct menu sequence performed.
Long low/long high beep sequence Input error; incorrect bar code, programming sequence, or Cancel scanned; digital scanner remains in ADF program
mode.
Short high/short low beep sequence Keyboard parameter selected. Enter value using numeric bar codes.
Short high/short low/short high/short
low beep sequence
Successful program exit with change in parameter setting.
Short low/short high/short low/short
high beep sequence
Out of host parameter storage space. Scan Set Default Parameter on page 4-5.
Code 39 Buffering
Hi/lo beeps New Code 39 data was entered into the buffer.
3 long high beeps Code 39 buffer is full.
Lo/hi/lo beeps The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer.
Lo/hi beeps A successful transmission of buffered data.
Macro PDF
2 long low beeps File ID error. A bar code not in the current MPDF sequence was scanned.
3 long low beeps Out of memory. There is not enough buffer space to store the current MPDF symbol.
4 long low beeps Bad symbology. Scanned a 1D or 2D bar code in a MPDF sequence, a duplicate MPDF label, a label in an incorrect order,
or trying to transmit an empty or illegal MPDF field.
5 long low beeps Flushing MPDF buffer.
Fast warble beep Aborting MPDF sequence.
Lo/Hi beeps Flushing an already empty MPDF buffer.
ADF Programming: Normal Data Entry. Duration of tones are short.
Hi/Lo beeps Enter another digit. Add leading zeros to the front if necessary.
Lo/Lo beeps Enter another alphabetic character or scan the End of Message bar code.
Scanning 2-5
LED Definitions
In addition to beep sequences, the digital scanner uses a two-color LED to indicate status. Table 2-2 defines LED colors that display
during scanning.
Hi/Hi beeps Enter another criterion or action, or scan the Save Rule bar code.
Hi/Lo/Hi/Lo beeps Rule saved. Rule entry mode exited.
Hi/Lo/Lo beeps All criteria or actions cleared for current rule, continue entering rule.
Low beep Delete last saved rule. The current rule is left intact.
Lo/Hi/Hi beeps All rules are deleted.
ADF Programming: Error Indications. Duration of tones are very long.
Lo/Hi/Lo/Hi beeps Out of rule memory. Erase some existing rules, then try to save rule again. (It is not necessary to re-enter the current
rule.)
Lo/Hi/Lo beeps Cancel rule entry. Rule entry mode exited because of an error or the user asked to exit rule entry.
Lo/Hi beeps Entry error, wrong bar code scanned. Re-enter criterion or action. All previously entered criteria and actions are
retained. Criteria or action list is too long for a rule.
Host Specific
USB only
4 short high beeps Digital scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several seconds and scan again.
Short low/short medium/short high
beep sequence after scanning a USB
device type
Communication with the bus must be established before the digital scanner can operate at the highest power level.
Short low/short medium/short high
beep sequence occurs more than once
The USB bus can put the digital scanner in a state where power to the digital scanner is cycled on and off more than
once. This is normal and usually happens when the PC cold boots.
RS-232 only
1 short high beep A <BEL> character is received and Beep on <BEL> is enabled.
Table 2-2. Standard LED Definitions
LED Indication
Off No power is applied to the digital scanner, or the digital scanner is on and ready to scan.
Green A bar code was successfully decoded.
Red A data transmission error or digital scanner malfunction occurred.
Table 2-1. Beeper Definitions (Continued)
Beeper Sequence Indication
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide2-6
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
Install and program the digital scanner (see Setting Up the Digital Scanner on page 1-4). For assistance, contact the local supplier or
the local Symbol Support Center.
Scanning with the Digital Scanner
1. Ensure all connections are secure (see the appropriate host chapter.)
2. Aim the digital scanner at the bar code.
3. Press and hold the trigger.
Figure 2-2. Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
4. The digital scanner projects a red laser aiming pattern (shown below) which allows positioning the bar code or object within
the field of view.
Figure 2-3. Laser Aiming Pattern
If necessary, the digital scanner turns on its red LEDs to illuminate the target bar code.
5. Center the symbol in any orientation within the aiming pattern. Be sure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area
formed by the brackets in the pattern.
Figure 2-4. Centering Symbol in Aiming Pattern
Linear bar code PDF417 symbol
Symbol
Aiming Pattern
1D bar code 2D bar code
Scanning 2-7
6. Hold the trigger until the digital scanner beeps, indicating the bar code is successfully decoded. For more information on
beeper and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.
This process usually occurs instantaneously. Steps 2 - 4 are repeated on poor quality or difficult bar codes, until the bar code is
decoded, the trigger is released, or the Decode Session Timeout is reached.
Aiming
Hold the digital scanner between two and nine inches (depending on symbol density; see Decode Zones on page 2-9) from the symbol,
centering the aiming pattern cross hairs on the symbol.
The aiming pattern is smaller when the digital scanner is closer to the symbol and larger when it is farther from the symbol. Scan
symbols with smaller bars or elements (mil size) closer to the digital scanner, and those with larger bars or elements (mil size) farther
from the digital scanner.
The digital scanner can also read a bar code presented within the aiming pattern but not centered. The top examples in Figure 2-5
show acceptable aiming options, while the bottom examples can not be decoded.
Figure 2-5. Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming
012345
012345
012345
012345
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide2-8
Scanning in Hands-Free Mode
The optional Intellistand adds greater flexibility to scanning operation. When the digital scanner is seated in the stand’s “cup,” the
digital scanner’s built-in sensor places the digital scanner in hands-free mode. When the digital scanner is removed from the stand
it operates in its normal hand-held mode.
Figure 2-6. Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Intellistand
To operate the digital scanner in the IntelliStand:
1. Ensure the digital scanner is properly connected to the host (see the appropriate host chapter for information on host
connections).
2. Insert the digital scanner in the Intellistand by placing the front of the digital scanner into the stand’s “cup” (see Figure 2-6).
3. Use the Intellistand’s adjustment knobs to adjust the height and angle of the digital scanner.
4. Center the symbol in the aiming pattern. The entire symbol must be within the brackets.
5. Upon successful decode, the digital scanner beeps and the LED turns green. For more information on beeper and LED
definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.
Scanner “Cup” Adjust height of
IntelliStand
Adjust angle of
scanner “cup”
Scanning 2-9
Decode Zones
Near Focus
Figure 2-7. DS 3408 Near Focus Decode Zone
In.
cm
0
20 mil
Depth of Field
9.5
2468
10
05.1 10.2 15.2 20.3 25.4
13 mil (100% UPC)
6.0
5 mil
0.8
7.3
2.0 5.5
15 mil PDF417
0
cm
W
i
d
t
h
o
f
F
i
e
l
d
0
1.75 4.4
3.5 8.9
8.9
*
*
* Minimum distance determined by symbol length and scan angle.
1.75
3.5
4.4
in.
Note: Typical performance at 73˚F (23˚C)
on high quality symbols in normal room light.
Vcc = 3.3V
7.5 mil
1.3
6.3
6.67 mil PDF417
2.3
4.5
10 mil PDF417
1.8
5.8
Top of
scanner
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide2-10
Far Focus
Figure 2-8. DS 3408 Far Focus Decode Zone
In.
cm
0
20 mil
Depth of Field
20.0
510 15 20
012.7 25.4 38.1 50.8
13 mil (100% UPC)
12.3
5 mil
1.5
14.5
5.0 6.0
15 mil PDF417
0
cm
W
i
d
t
h
o
f
F
i
e
l
d
0
410.2
820.3
20.3
*
*
* Minimum distance determined by symbol length and scan angle.
8
10.2
in.
Note: Typical performance at 73˚F (23˚C)
on high quality symbols in normal room light.
Vcc = 3.3V
7.5 mil
2.8
8.5
10 mil PDF417
4.3
8.8
4
Top of
scanner
Scanning 2-11
Toggled Focus
Figure 2-9. DS 3408 Toggled Focus Decode Zone
In.
cm
0
20 mil
Depth of Field
20.0
510 15 20
012.7 25.4 38.1 50.8
13 mil (100% UPC)
12.3
5 mil
0.8
14.5
2.0 6.0
15 mil PDF417
0
cm
W
i
d
t
h
o
f
F
i
e
l
d
0
410.2
820.3
20.3
*
*
* Minimum distance determined by symbol length and scan angle.
8
10.2
in.
Note: Typical performance at 73˚F (23˚C)
on high quality symbols in normal room light.
Vcc = 3.3V
7.5 mil
1.3
8.5
10 mil PDF417
1.8
8.8
4
6.67 mil PDF417
2.3 4.5
Top of
scanner
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide2-12
Maintenance and Technical
Specifications
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Digital Scanner Signal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide3-2
Maintenance and Technical Specifications 3-3
Introduction
This chapter provides suggested scanner maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal descriptions (pinouts).
Maintenance
Cleaning the scan window is the only maintenance required. A dirty window can affect scanning accuracy.
• Do not allow abrasive material to touch the window.
• Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth.
• Wipe the window using a tissue moistened with ammonia/water.
• Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the window.
Troubleshooting
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions
The aiming pattern does not appear when pressing
the trigger.
No power to the digital scanner. If the configuration requires a power supply,
re-connect the power supply.
Incorrect host interface cable is used. Connect the correct host interface cable.
Interface/power cables are loose. Re-connect cables.
Digital scanner is disabled. For Synapse or IBM 468x mode, enable the digital
scanner via the host interface. Otherwise, see the
technical person in charge of scanning.
If using RS-232 Nixdorf B mode, CTS is not asserted. Assert CTS line.
Aiming pattern is disabled. Enable the aiming pattern. See Decode Aiming
Pattern on page 5-6.
Scanner emits short low/short medium/short high
beep sequence (power-up beep sequence) more than
once.
The USB bus may put the digital scanner in a state
where power to the digital scanner is cycled on and
off more than once.
Normal during host reset.
Digital scanner emits aiming pattern, but does not
decode the bar code.
Digital scanner is not programmed for the correct bar
code type.
Program the digital scanner to read that type of bar
code. See Chapter 13, Symbologies.
Bar code symbol is unreadable. Scan test symbols of the same bar code type to
determine if the bar code is defaced.
The symbol is not completely inside aiming pattern. Move the symbol completely within the aiming
pattern.
Digital scanner emits 4 short high beeps during
decode attempt.
Digital scanner has not completed USB initialization. Wait several seconds and scan again.
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide3-4
If after performing these checks the digital scanner still experiences problems, contact the distributor or call
the local Symbol Support Center. See page xiv for the telephone numbers.
Digital scanner decodes bar code, but does not
transmit the data to the host.
Digital scanner is not programmed for the correct
host type.
Scan the appropriate host type programming bar
code. See the chapter corresponding to the host
type.
Interface cable is loose. Re-connect the cable.
If 4 long low beeps are heard, a transmission error
occurred.
Set the digital scanner's communication parameters
to match the host's setting.
If 5 low beeps are heard, a conversion or format error
occurred.
Configure the digital scanner's conversion
parameters properly.
If lo/hi/lo beeps are heard, an invalid ADF rule is
detected.
Program the correct ADF rules.
If hi/lo beeps are heard, the digital scanner is
buffering Code 39 data.
Normal scanning a Code 39 bar code and the Code
39 Buffering option is enabled.
Host displays scanned data incorrectly. Digital scanner is not programmed to work with the
host.
Scan the appropriate host type programming bar
code.
For RS-232, set the digital scanner's communication
parameters to match the host's settings.
For a Keyboard Wedge configuration, program the
system for the correct keyboard type, and turn off the
CAPS LOCK key.
Program the proper editing options (e.g., UPC-E to
UPC-A Conversion).
Digital scanner emits hi/hi/hi/Lo beeps when not in
use.
RS-232 receive error. Normal during host reset. Otherwise, set the digital
scanner's RS-232 parity to match the host setting.
Digital scanner emits lo/hi beeps during
programming.
Input error or Cancel bar code was scanned. Scan the correct numeric bar codes within range for
the parameter programmed.
Digital scanner emits lo/hi/lo/hi beeps during
programming.
Out of ADF parameter storage space. Erase all rules and re-program with shorter rules.
Out of Synapse parameter storage space. Scan Set Synapse Defaults bar code for cables no
longer in use and re-program the digital scanner for
the current host interface.
Digital scanner emits lo/hi/lo beeps. Clearing Code 39 buffer. Normal when scanning the Code 39 Buffering Clear
Buffer bar code or upon attempt to transmit an
empty Code 39 buffer.
Digital scanner emits a power-up beep after
changing USB host type.
The USB bus re-established power to the digital
scanner.
Normal when changing USB host type.
Digital scanner emits one high beep when not in use. In RS-232 mode, a <BEL> character was received
and Beep on <BEL> option is enabled.
Normal when Beep on <BEL> is enabled and the
digital scanner is in RS-232 mode.
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions
Note
Maintenance and Technical Specifications 3-5
Technical Specifications
Table 3-2. Technical Specifications
Item Description
Power Requirements 5 VDC + / - 10% @ approximately 220 mA RMS (nominal), 500 mA (max)
Power Source
Depending on host:
• Host powered
• External power supply, 5.2 V nominal
Decode Capability
UPC/EAN, UPC/EAN with supplementals, UCC/EAN, JAN 8 & 13, 128, Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 39 Trioptic,
Codabar (NW7), Interleaved 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5, Code 128, Code 93, MSI, Code 11, Code 32, Coupon
Code, Bookland EAN, RSS, US Postnet, US Planet,UK Postal, Japan Postal, Australia Postal, Dutch Postal, Composite
Codes, PDF417, MicroPDF, Maxicode, Data Matrix (ECC 200), QR Code.
Beeper Operation User-selectable: enable, disable
Beeper Volume User-selectable: three levels
Beeper Tone User-selectable: three tones
Yaw Tolerance ± 50° from normal
Pitch Tolerance ± 60° from normal
Roll Tolerance ± 180° from normal
Print Contrast Minimum 25% minimum reflectance differential, measured at 650 nm.
Ambient Light Immunity 10,000 Ft Candles (107,600 Lux)
Durability 6.5 ft (2 m) drop to concrete
Operating Temperature -4° to 122° F (-20° to 50° C)
Storage Temperature -40° to 158° F (-40° to 70° C)
Humidity 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Weight (without cable) 11.73 oz. (335 g)
Dimensions:
Height
Width
Depth
7.34 in. (18.65 cm)
4.82 in. (12.25 cm)
2.93 in. (7.43 cm)
Laser 650nm laser diode
Laser Classifications IEC 825-1 Class 2
ESD 15 kV area discharge
8 kV contact discharge
Minimum Element Width 5 mil (0.127 mm)
Interfaces Supported RS-232, Keyboard Wedge, Wand Emulation, Scanner Emulation, IBM 468X/469X, USB, Synapse
Electrical Safety UL1950, CSA C22.2 No.950. EN60950/IC950
Input Transient Protection IEC 1000-4-(2,3,4,5,6,11)
EMI FCC Part 15 Class B, ICES-003 Class B European Union EMC Directive,
Japan VCCI/MITI/Dentori
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide3-6
Digital Scanner Signal Descriptions
Figure 3-1. Digital Scanner Cable Pinouts
The signal descriptions in Table 3-3 apply to the connector on the digital scanner and are for reference only.
Table 3-3. Digital Scanner Signal Pin-outs
Pin IBM Synapse RS-232 Keyboard Wedge Wand USB
Scanner
Emulation
1Reserved SynClock Reserved Reserved Reserved Jump to Pin 6 DBP
2Power Power Power Power Power Power Power
3Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground
4IBM_A(+) Reserved TxD KeyClock DBP Reserved SOS
5Reserved Reserved RxD TermData CTS D + Decode
6IBM_B(-) SynData RTS KeyData RTS Jump to Pin 1 Trigger
7Reserved Reserved CTS TermClock Reserved D - Enable
8Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
9Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
10 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Cable interface port
Interface cable
modular connector
Bottom of scanner
PIN 1PIN 10
User Preferences
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
User Preferences Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Set Default Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Parameter Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Beeper Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Beeper Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Power Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Time Delay to Low Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Trigger Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Decode Session Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Beep After Good Decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Scanstand Session Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide4-2
User Preferences 4-3
Introduction
If desired, program the digital scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes each user
preference feature and provides the programming bar codes necessary for selecting these features.
The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in the Table 4-1 on page 4-4 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters
for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are
preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down.
Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where the bar code can be seen clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.
If not using a Synapse or USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the
power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set All Defaults bar code on 4-5. Throughout the programming bar code menus,
default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the beeper tone to high, scan the High Frequency
(beeper tone) bar code listed under Beeper Tone on page 4-6. The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green,
signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters, such as Serial Response Time-Out or Data Transmission Formats, require scanning several bar codes. See
these parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Note
*High Volume Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide4-4
User Preferences Parameter Defaults
Table 4-1 lists defaults for user preferences parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the User
Preferences section beginning on page 4-5.
See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 4-1. User Preferences Default Table
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter All Defaults 4-5
Parameter Scanning ECh Enable 4-5
Beeper Tone 91h Medium 4-6
Beeper Volume 8Ch High 4-7
Power Mode 80h Continuous On 4-7
Time Delay to Low Power Mode 92h 5 Minutes 4-8
Trigger Mode 8Ah Level 4-9
Decode Session Timeout 88h 9.9 Sec 4-10
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol 89h 0.6 Sec 4-10
Beep After Good Decode 38h Enable 4-11
Scanstand Session Timeout F0h, 90h 2 Seconds 4-11
Note
User Preferences 4-5
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
Scan this bar code to return all parameters to the default values listed in Table A-1 on page A-3.
Parameter Scanning
Parameter # ECh
To disable decoding of parameter bar codes, scan the Disable Parameter Scanning bar code below. Note that the Set Defaults
parameter bar code can still be decoded. To enable decoding of parameter bar codes, either scan Enable Parameter Scanning or
Set All Defaults.
*Set All Defaults
*Enable Parameter Scanning
(01h)
Disable Parameter Scanning
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide4-6
Beeper Tone
Parameter # 91h
To select a decode beep frequency (tone), scan the Low Frequency, Medium Frequency, or High Frequency bar code.
Low Frequency
(02h)
*Medium Frequency
(Optimum Setting)
(01h)
High Frequency
(00h)
User Preferences 4-7
Beeper Volume
Parameter # 8Ch
To select a beeper volume, scan the Low Volume, Medium Volume, or High Volume bar code.
Power Mode
Parameter # 80h
This parameter determines whether or not power remains on after a decode attempt. In reduced power mode, the digital scanner
enters into a low power consumption mode to preserve battery life after each decode attempt. In continuous power mode, power
remains on after each decode attempt.
Low Volume
(02h)
Medium Volume
(01h)
*High Volume
(00h)
*Continuous On
(00h)
Reduced Power Mode
(01h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide4-8
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
Parameter # 92h
This parameter only applies when Power Mode is set to Reduced Power.
This parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains active after decoding. The digital scanner wakes upon trigger pull or when
the host attempts to communicate with the digital scanner.
1 Second
(11h)
5 Seconds
(15h)
1 Minute
(21h)
*5 Minutes
(25h)
Note
User Preferences 4-9
Trigger Mode
Parameter # 8Ah
Select one of the following trigger modes for the digital scanner:
•Level - A trigger pull activates decode processing. Decode processing continues until the bar code is decoded, the trigger
is released, or the Decode Session Timeout is reached.
•Blink - This trigger mode is used in hands-free (Intellistand) mode. The digital scanner activates decode processing when
it detects a bar code in its field of view. Decoding range is reduced in this mode.
•Host - A host command issues the triggering signal. The digital scanner interprets an actual trigger pull as a Level triggering
option.
Time Delay to Low Power Mode (continued)
15 Minutes
(2Bh)
1 Hour
(31h)
*Level
(00h)
Blink
(07h)
Host
(08h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide4-10
Decode Session Timeout
Parameter # 88h
This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is programmable in 0.1 second
increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default timeout is 9.9 seconds.
To set a Decode Session Timeout, scan the bar code below. Next, scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes
that correspond to the desired on time. Single digit numbers must have a leading zero. For example, to set a Decode Session Timeout
of 0.5 seconds, scan the bar code below, then scan the 0 and 5 bar codes. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel
on page D-4.
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
Parameter # 89h
This option is used in hands-free (Intellistand) mode to prevent the beeper from continuously beeping when a symbol is left in the
digital scanner’s field of view. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.0 to 9.9 seconds. The default interval is 0.6 seconds.
To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol, scan the bar code below, then scan two numeric bar codes from
Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.
Decode Session Timeout
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
User Preferences 4-11
Beep After Good Decode
Parameter # 38h
Scan a bar code below to select whether or not the digital scanner beeps after a good decode. If selecting Do Not Beep After Good
Decode, the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and to indicate error conditions.
Scanstand Session Timeout
Parameter # F0h, 90h
To set the amount of time the digital scanner attempts to decode a bar code in hands-free mode (blink mode), scan the bar code below.
Next, scan three numeric bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes to select a value between 1 and 255 that represents tenths
of a second. Single digit numbers must have a leading zero. For example, to set 0.5 seconds, scan the bar code below, then scan the
0, 0, 5 bar codes. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. The default value is 2 seconds.
*Beep After Good Decode
(Enable)
(01h)
Do Not Beep After Good Decode
(Disable)
(00h)
Scanstand Session Timeout
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide4-12
Decoding Preferences
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Decoding Preferences Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Decoding Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Focus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Decoding Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Decode Aiming Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide5-2
Decoding Preferences 5-3
Introduction
If desired, program the digital scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes digital
scanner preference features and provides the programming bar codes for selecting these features.
The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in the Decoding Preferences Default Table on page 5-4 (also see Appendix A,
Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is
not necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are
preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down.
Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where the bar code can be seen clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.
If not using a Synapse or USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps
sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set Default Parameter bar code on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar code
menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to disable the decode aiming pattern, scan the Disable
Decode Aiming Pattern bar code listed under Decode Aiming Pattern on page 5-6. The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep
and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See these parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Decoding Preferences Parameter Defaults
Table 5-1 lists defaults for digital scanner preferences parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided
in Decoding Preferences on page 5-5.
See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Note
Feature/Option
* Indicates Default *Enable Decode Aiming Pattern
(02h) Hex Value
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide5-4
Table 5-1. Decoding Preferences Default Table
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
Decoding Options
Focus Mode F0h A6h Far Focus 5-5
Decoding Illumination F0h 2Ah Enable 5-6
Decode Aiming Pattern F0h 32h Enable 5-6
Decoding Preferences 5-5
Decoding Preferences
The parameters in this chapter control bar code decoding characteristics.
Focus Mode
Parameter # F0h, A6h
Select the Focus Mode to control the working range of the digital scanner. If Far Focus is selected, the digital scanner is optimized
to read at its far position. With Near Focus, the digital scanner is optimized to read at its near position. Smart Focus toggles the
focus position after every frame.
*Far Focus
(00h)
Near Focus
(01h)
Smart Focus
(02h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide5-6
Decoding Illumination
Parameter # F0h, 2Ah
Selecting Enable Illumination causes the digital scanner to flash illumination to aid decoding. Select Disable Illumination to prevent
the digital scanner from using decoding illumination.
Enabling illumination usually results in superior images. The effectiveness of the illumination decreases as the distance to the target
increases.
Decode Aiming Pattern
Parameter # F0h, 32h
This parameter only applies when in Decode Mode. Select Enable Decode Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern during bar
code capture, or Disable Decode Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off.
*Enable Decoding Illumination
(01h)
Disable Decoding Illumination
(00h)
*Enable Decode Aiming Pattern
(02h)
Disable Decode Aiming Pattern
(00h)
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Keyboard Wedge Host Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Intra-Keystroke Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Caps Lock On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Caps Lock Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Convert Wedge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
FN1 Substitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Send Make and Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Keyboard Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide6-2
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6-3
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up a Keyboard Wedge interface with the digital scanner. With this interface, the digital scanner is
connected between the keyboard and host computer, and translates bar code data into keystrokes. The host computer accepts the
keystrokes as if they originated from the keyboard. This mode adds bar code reading functionality to a system designed for manual
keyboard input. Keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure
to set the document magnification to a level where the bar code can be seen clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not
merging.
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface
Figure 6-1. Keyboard Wedge Connection with Y-cable
To connect the Keyboard Wedge interface Y-cable:
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 6-1 are examples only.
The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the
same.
1. Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector.
2. Attach the modular connector of the Y-cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner. (See Installing the Interface
Cable on page 1-4.)
*North American Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
Note
Male DIN Connector
Female DIN Connector
Keyboard Connector
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide6-4
3. Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on the host device.
4. Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard connector.
5. If needed, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y-cable.
6. Ensure that all connections are secure.
7. Turn on the host system.
8. Select the Keyboard Wedge host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Keyboard Wedge Host Types on page 6-5.
9. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults
Table 6-1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) in the
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters section beginning on page 6-5.
See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 6-1. Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table
Parameter Default Page Number
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC/AT& IBM PC Compatibles 6-5
Country Types (Country Codes) North American 6-6
Ignore Unknown Characters Transmit 6-8
Keystroke Delay No Delay 6-8
Intra-Keystroke Delay Disable 6-9
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Disable 6-9
Caps Lock On Disable 6-10
Caps Lock Override Disable 6-10
Convert Wedge Data No Convert 6-11
Function Key Mapping Disable 6-11
FN1 Substitution Disable 6-12
Send and Make Break Send 6-12
Note
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6-5
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Types
Select the Keyboard Wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below.
IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles
IBM PS/2 (Model 30)
IBM AT Notebook
IBM XT
NCR 7052
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide6-6
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes)
Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. If the keyboard type is not listed, see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on
page 6-9.
*North American
German Windows
French Windows
French Canadian Windows 95/98
French Canadian Windows XP/2000
Spanish Windows
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6-7
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (continued)
Italian Windows
Swedish Windows
UK English Windows
Japanese Windows
Portuguese-Brazilian Windows
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide6-8
Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected,
all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner. When Do Not Send Bar
Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character, then the digital scanner
issues an error beep.
Keystroke Delay
This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a
slower transmission of data.
*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
(Transmit)
Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
*No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6-9
Intra-Keystroke Delay
When enabled, an additional delay is inserted between each emulated key depression and release. This sets the Keystroke Delay
parameter to a minimum of 5 msec as well.
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation
This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) on page 6-
6 in a Microsoft® operating system environment.
Enable
*Disable
Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad
*Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide6-10
Caps Lock On
When enabled, the digital scanner emulates keystrokes as if the Caps Lock key is always pressed.
Caps Lock Override
When enabled, on AT or AT Notebook hosts, the keyboard ignores the state of the Caps Lock key. Therefore, an ‘A’ in the bar code is
sent as an ‘A’ no matter what the state of the keyboard’s Caps Lock key.
If both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes precedence.
Enable Caps Lock On
*Disable Caps Lock On
Enable Caps Lock Override
*Disable Caps Lock Override
Note
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6-11
Convert Wedge Data
When enabled, the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case.
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see Table 6-2 on page 6-15). When this parameter is enabled, the
keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or
not this parameter is enabled.
Convert to Upper Case
Convert to Lower Case
*No Convert
Enable
*Disable
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide6-12
FN1 Substitution
When this is enabled, the digital scanner replaces FN1 characters in an EAN128 bar code with a keystroke chosen by the user (see
FN1 Substitution Values on page 14-8).
Send Make and Break
When enabled, the scan codes for releasing a key are not sent.
Enable
*Disable
*Send Make and Break Scan Codes
Send Make Scan Code Only
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6-13
Keyboard Maps
The following keyboard maps are provided for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To program the prefix/suffix values, see the bar
codes on page 14-6.
Figure 6-2. IBM PS2 Type Keyboard
Figure 6-3. IBM PC/XT
Figure 6-4. IBM PC/AT
7013
7014 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010
7013
5011 7010 7007 7006
7001
5012
7008
7009
7011 7012 7003
7002 7004 7005
7017 7016
7015
7018
5001 5002
5003 5004
5005 5006
5007 5008
5009 5010
7009
7014 7008
7013
7012
7004
7011 7002
7003
7006
5001 5002
5003 5004
5005 5006
5007 5008
5009 5010
7009
7008
7013
7012
7004
7011
7003
7002
7014
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide6-14
Figure 6-5. NCR 7052 32-KEY
Figure 6-6. NCR 7052 58-KEY
5007 5008
5010
5002
5003 5004
5005 5006
1046
1045
5014
1043
5013
5015
5016
5018
5019
5001
5017
7013
5011
(7013 if double key)
(1048 if double key)
1048 5012
5009
5007 5008
5010
5002
5003 5004
5005 5006
1046
1045
5014
1043
5013
5015
5016
5018
5019
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
5001
1066
1072 1073
1079 1080
1065 1070
1076 1077
1083 1084
1071
1078
1085
1069
5017
7013
5011
1082
1075
1068
1067
(1043 if double key)
(1048 if double key)
1048 5012
5009
1074
1081
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6-15
ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge
Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character ($ + % /) preceding a Code 39 character and
assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, when Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled and +B is
scanned, it is interpreted as b, %J as ?, and %V as @. Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent
of ABC >.
Table 6-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set
ASCII Value
Full ASCII
Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1001 $A CTRL A
1002 $B CTRL B
1003 $C CTRL C
1004 $D CTRL D
1005 $E CTRL E
1006 $F CTRL F
1007 $G CTRL G
1008 $H CTRL H/BACKSPACE1
1009 $I CTRL I/HORIZONTAL
TAB1
1010 $J CTRL J
1011 $K CTRL K
1012 $L CTRL L
1013 $M CTRL M/ENTER1
1014 $N CTRL N
1015 $O CTRL O
1016 $P CTRL P
1017 $Q CTRL Q
1018 $R CTRL R
1019 $S CTRL S
1020 $T CTRL T
1021 $U CTRL U
1022 $V CTRL V
1023 $W CTRL W
1024 $X CTRL X
1025 $Y CTRL Y
1026 $Z CTRL Z
1027 %A CTRL [ /ESC1
1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise,
the unbolded keystroke is sent.
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide6-16
1028 %B CTRL \
1029 %C CTRL ]
1030 %D CTRL 6
1031 %E CTRL -
1032 Space Space
1033 /A !
1034 /B “
1035 /C #
1036 /D $
1037 /E %
1038 /F &
1039 /G ‘
1040 /H (
1041 /I )
1042 /J *
1043 /K +
1044 /L ,
1045 - -
1046 . .
1047 /O /
1048 0 0
1049 1 1
1050 2 2
1051 3 3
1052 4 4
1053 5 5
1054 6 6
1055 7 7
1056 8 8
1057 9 9
1058 /Z :
1059 %F ;
1060 %G <
Table 6-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value
Full ASCII
Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise,
the unbolded keystroke is sent.
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6-17
1061 %H =
1062 %I >
1063 %J ?
1064 %V @
1065 A A
1066 B B
1067 C C
1068 D D
1069 E E
1070 F F
1071 G G
1072 H H
1073 I I
1074 J J
1075 K K
1076 L L
1077 M M
1078 N N
1079 O O
1080 P P
1081 Q Q
1082 R R
1083 S S
1084 T T
1085 U U
1086 V V
1087 W W
1088 X X
1089 Y Y
1090 Z Z
1091 %K [
1092 %L \
1093 %M ]
Table 6-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value
Full ASCII
Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise,
the unbolded keystroke is sent.
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide6-18
1094 %N ^
1095 %O _
1096 %W ‘
1097 +A a
1098 +B b
1099 +C c
1100 +D d
1101 +E e
1102 +F f
1103 +G g
1104 +H h
1105 +I i
1106 +J j
1107 +K k
1108 +L l
1109 +M m
1110 +N n
1111 +O o
1112 +P p
1113 +Q q
1114 +R r
1115 +S s
1116 +T t
1117 +U u
1118 +V v
1119 +W w
1120 +X x
1121 +Y y
1122 +Z z
1123 %P {
1124 %Q |
1125 %R }
1126 %S ~
Table 6-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value
Full ASCII
Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise,
the unbolded keystroke is sent.
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6-19
Table 6-3. Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set
ALT Keys Keystroke
2065 ALT A
2066 ALT B
2067 ALT C
2068 ALT D
2069 ALT E
2070 ALT F
2071 ALT G
2072 ALT H
2073 ALT I
2074 ALT J
2075 ALT K
2076 ALT L
2077 ALT M
2078 ALT N
2079 ALT O
2080 ALT P
2081 ALT Q
2082 ALT R
2083 ALT S
2084 ALT T
2085 ALT U
2086 ALT V
2087 ALT W
2088 ALT X
2089 ALT Y
2090 ALT Z
Table 6-4. Keyboard Wedge GUI Key Character Set
GUI Keys Keystrokes
3000 Right Control Key
3048 GUI 0
3049 GUI 1
3050 GUI 2
3051 GUI 3
3052 GUI 4
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide6-20
3053 GUI 5
3054 GUI 6
3055 GUI 7
3056 GUI 8
3057 GUI 9
3065 GUI A
3066 GUI B
3067 GUI C
3068 GUI D
3069 GUI E
3070 GUI F
3071 GUI G
3072 GUI H
3073 GUI I
3074 GUI J
3075 GUI K
3076 GUI L
3077 GUI M
3078 GUI N
3079 GUI O
3080 GUI P
3081 GUI Q
3082 GUI R
3083 GUI S
3084 GUI T
3085 GUI U
3086 GUI V
3087 GUI W
3088 GUI X
3089 GUI Y
3090 GUI Z
Table 6-4. Keyboard Wedge GUI Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Keys Keystrokes
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6-21
Table 6-5. Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set
F Keys Keystroke
5001 F1
5002 F2
5003 F3
5004 F4
5005 F5
5006 F6
5007 F7
5008 F8
5009 F9
5010 F10
5011 F11
5012 F12
5013 F13
5014 F14
5015 F15
5016 F16
5017 F17
5018 F18
5019 F19
5020 F20
5021 F21
5022 F22
5023 F23
5024 F24
Table 6-6. Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
6042 *
6043 +
6044 undefined
6045 -
6046 .
6047 /
6048 0
6049 1
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide6-22
6050 2
6051 3
6052 4
6053 5
6054 6
6055 7
6056 8
6057 9
6058 Enter
6059 Num Lock
Table 6-7. Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set
Extended Keypad Keystroke
7001 Break
7002 Delete
7003 Pg Up
7004 End
7005 Pg Dn
7006 Pause
7007 Scroll Lock
7008 Backspace
7009 Tab
7010 Print Screen
7011 Insert
7012 Home
7013 Enter
7014 Escape
7015 Up Arrow
7016 Dn Arrow
7017 Left Arrow
7018 Right Arrow
Table 6-6. Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set (Continued)
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
RS-232 Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Connecting an RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
RS-232 Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
RS-232 Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
RS-232 Host Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Baud Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Parity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Stop Bit Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Data Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Check Receive Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Hardware Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Hardware Handshaking (continued). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Software Handshaking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Host Serial Response Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
RTS Line State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Beep on <BEL> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Intercharacter Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
ASCII Character Set for RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide7-2
RS-232 Interface 7-3
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with an RS-232 host. The RS-232 interface is used to connect the digital
scanner to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port (e.g., com port).
If the host is not listed in Table 7-2, refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication parameters to match the host.
The digital scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For
system architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Symbol offers different cables providing TTL-to-RS-
232C conversion. Contact the Symbol Support Center for more information.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure
to set the document magnification to a level where the bar code can be seen clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not
merging.
Note
*Baud Rate 9600 Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide7-4
Connecting an RS-232 Interface
This connection is made directly from the digital scanner to the host computer.
Figure 7-1. RS-232 Direct Connection
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 7-1 are examples only.
The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the
same.
1. Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner (see Installing
the Interface Cable on page 1-4).
2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host.
3. Connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power supply into an
appropriate outlet.
4. Select the RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from RS-232 Host Types on page 7-8.
5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
Interface Cable
Serial Port Connector to Host
Power Supply Cable
Note
RS-232 Interface 7-5
RS-232 Parameter Defaults
Table 7-1 lists the defaults for RS-232 host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the RS-
232 Host Parameters section beginning on page 7-6.
See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 7-1. RS-232 Host Default Table
Parameter Default Page Number
RS-232 Host Parameters
RS-232 Host Types Standard 7-8
Baud Rate 9600 7-10
Parity Type None 7-11
Stop Bit Select 1 Stop Bit 7-12
Data Bits 8-Bit 7-12
Check Receive Errors Enable 7-13
Hardware Handshaking None 7-15
Software Handshaking None 7-16
Host Serial Response Time-out 2 Sec 7-17
RTS Line State Low RTS 7-18
Beep on <BEL> Disable 7-18
Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 7-19
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Normal Operation 7-20
Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 7-20
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide7-6
RS-232 Host Parameters
Various RS-232 hosts are set up with their own parameter default settings (Table 7-2). Selecting standard, ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, or Omron sets the defaults listed below.
Table 7-2. Terminal Specific RS-232
Parameter Standard
(Default) ICL Fujitsu
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode A
Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode B/OPOS/
JPOS
Olivetti Omron
Transmit Code ID No YesYesYesYes YesYes
Data Transmission Format
Data as is Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Prefix/Data/
Suffix
Data/Suffix
Suffix CR/LF (7013) CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) ETX (1002) CR (1013)
Baud Rate 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600
Parity None Even None Odd Odd Even None
Hardware Handshaking
None RTS/CTS
Option 3
None RTS/CTS
Option 3
RTS/CTS Option 3 None None
Software Handshaking None None None None None Ack/Nak None
Serial Response Time-out 2 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 2 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec.
Stop Bit Select One One One One One One One
ASCII Format 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 7-Bit 8-Bit
Beep On <BEL> Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
RTS Line State
Low High Low Low Low = No data to
send
Low High
Prefix None None None None None STX (1003) None
*In the Nixdorf Mode B, if CTS is Low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is High, the user can scan bar codes.
**If Nixdorf Mode B is scanned without the digital scanner connected to the proper host, it may appear unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232
host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the digital scanner.
RS-232 Interface 7-7
RS-232 Host Parameters (continued)
Selecting ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, or Omron enables the transmission of
code ID characters listed in Table 7-3. These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID
feature. Do not enable the Transmit Code ID feature for these terminals.
Table 7-3. Terminal Specific Code ID Characters
ICL Fujitsu
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode A
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode B/
OPOS/JPOS
Olivetti Omron
UPC-A AAAAAA
UPC-E EECCCE
EAN-8/JAN-8 FFFFBBBFF
EAN-13/JAN-13 F F AAAF
Code 39 C <len> None M M M <len> C <len>
Codabar N <len> None N N N <len> N <len>
Code 128 L <len> None K K K <len> L <len>
I 2 of 5 I <len> None I I I <len> I <len>
Code 93 None None L L L <len> None
D 2 of 5 H <len> None H H H <len> H <len>
UCC/EAN 128 L <len> None P P P <len> L <len>
MSI None None O O O <len> None
Bookland EAN F F AAAF
Trioptic None None None None None None
Code 11 None None None None None None
IATA H<len> None H H None None
Code 32 None None None None None None
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide7-8
RS-232 Host Types
To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following bar codes.
Standard RS-232
ICL RS-232
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B
Olivetti ORS4500
Omron
RS-232 Interface 7-9
RS-232 Host Types (continued)
Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the digital scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of
the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form.
OPOS/JPOS
Fujitsu RS-232
Baud Rate 600
Baud Rate 1200
Baud Rate 2400
Baud Rate 4800
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide7-10
Baud Rate (continued)
*Baud Rate 9600
Baud Rate 19,200
Baud Rate 38,400
Baud Rate 57,600
RS-232 Interface 7-11
Parity
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to host device
requirements.
• Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an odd number of 1 bits are contained
in the coded character.
• Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an even number of 1 bits are
contained in the coded character.
• Select Mark parity and the parity bit is always 1.
• Select Space parity and the parity bit is always 0.
• Select None when no parity bit is required.
Odd
Even
Mark
Space
*None
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide7-12
Stop Bit Select
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving
device for the next character in the serial data stream. The number of stop bits selected (one or two) depends on the number the
receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements.
Data Bits
This parameter allows the digital scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol.
*1 Stop Bit
2 Stop Bits
7-Bit
*8-Bit
RS-232 Interface 7-13
Check Receive Errors
Select whether or not the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters are checked. The parity value of received characters is
verified against the parity parameter selected above.
*Check For Received Errors
Do Not Check For Received Errors
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide7-14
Hardware Handshaking
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines, Request to
Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS).
If Standard RTS/CTS handshaking is not selected, scan data is transmitted as it becomes available. If Standard RTS/CTS handshaking
is selected, scan data is transmitted according to the following sequence:
• The digital scanner reads the CTS line for activity. If CTS is asserted, the digital scanner waits up to Host Serial Response
Time-out for the host to de-assert the CTS line. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out (default), the CTS line is still asserted,
the digital scanner sounds a transmit error, and any scanned data is lost.
• When the CTS line is de-asserted, the digital scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out
for the host to assert CTS. When the host asserts CTS, data is transmitted. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out (default),
the CTS line is not asserted, the digital scanner sounds a transmit error, and discards the data.
• When data transmission is complete, the digital scanner de-asserts RTS 10 msec after sending the last character.
• The host should respond by negating CTS. The digital scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next transmission of
data.
During the transmission of data, the CTS line should be asserted. If CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the
transmission is aborted, the digital scanner sounds a transmission error, and the data is discarded.
If the above communication sequence fails, the digital scanner issues an error indication. In this case, the data is lost and must be
rescanned.
If Hardware Handshaking and Software Handshaking are both enabled, Hardware Handshaking takes precedence.
The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.
•None: Scan the bar code below if no Hardware Handshaking is desired.
•Standard RTS/CTS: Scan the bar code below to select Standard RTS/CTS Hardware Handshaking.
•RTS/CTS Option 1: When RTS/CTS Option 1 is selected, the digital scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores
the state of CTS. The digital scanner de-asserts RTS when the transmission is complete.
•RTS/CTS Option 2: When Option 2 is selected, RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level). However, the
digital scanner waits for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within Host Serial Response
Time-out (default), the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data.
•RTS/CTS Option 3: When Option 3 is selected, the digital scanner asserts RTS prior to any data transmission, regardless
of the state of CTS. The digital scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out (default) for CTS to be asserted. If CTS is
not asserted during this time, the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The digital scanner de-
asserts RTS when transmission is complete.
Note
RS-232 Interface 7-15
Hardware Handshaking (continued)
*None
Standard RTS/CTS
RTS/CTS Option 1
RTS/CTS Option 2
RTS/CTS Option 3
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide7-16
Software Handshaking
This parameter offers control of the data transmission process in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware handshaking.
There are five options.
If Software Handshaking and Hardware Handshaking are both enabled, Hardware Handshaking takes precedence.
•None: When this option is selected, data is transmitted immediately. No response is expected from host.
•ACK/NAK: When this option is selected, after transmitting data, the digital scanner expects either an ACK or NAK response
from the host. When a NAK is received, the digital scanner transmits the same data again and waits for either an ACK or
NAK. After three unsuccessful attempts to send data when NAKs are received, the digital scanner issues an error indication
and discards the data.
The digital scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time-out to receive an ACK or NAK. If the digital
scanner does not get a response in this time, it issues an error indication and discards the data. There are no retries when
a time-out occurs.
•ENQ: hen this option is selected, the digital scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data. If
an ENQ is not received within the Host Serial Response Time-out, the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards
the data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Time-out to prevent transmission
errors.
•ACK/NAK with ENQ: This combines the two previous options. For re-transmissions of data, due to a NAK from the host,
an additional ENQ is not required.
•XON/XOFF: An XOFF character turns the digital scanner transmission off until the digital scanner receives an XON character.
There are two situations for XON/XOFF:
• XOFF is received before the digital scanner has data to send. When the digital scanner has data to send, it waits up to
Host Serial Response Time-out for an XON character before transmission. If the XON is not received within this time, the
digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data.
• XOFF is received during a transmission. Data transmission then stops after sending the current byte. When the digital
scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data message. The digital scanner waits up to 30 seconds
for the XON.
*None
ACK/NAK
ENQ
RS-232 Interface 7-17
Software Handshaking (continued)
Host Serial Response Time-out
This parameter specifies how long the digital scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, or CTS before determining that a transmission error
has occurred. This only applies when in one of the ACK/NAK Software Handshaking modes, or RTS/CTS Hardware Handshaking
option.
ACK/NAK with ENQ
XON/XOFF
*Minimum: 2 Sec
Low: 2.5 Sec
Medium: 5 Sec
High: 7.5 Sec
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide7-18
Host Serial Response Time-out (continued)
RTS Line State
This parameter sets the idle state of the Serial Host RTS line. Scan a bar code below to select Low RTS or High RTS line state.
Beep on <BEL>
When this parameter is enabled, the digital scanner issues a beep when a <BEL> character is detected on the RS-232 serial line.
<BEL> is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal entry or other important event.
Maximum: 9.9 Sec
*Host: Low RTS
Host: High RTS
Beep On <BEL> Character
(Enable)
*Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character
(Disable)
RS-232 Interface 7-19
Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.
*Minimum: 0 msec
Low: 25 msec
Medium: 50 msec
High: 75 msec
Maximum: 99 msec
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide7-20
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
When Nixdorf Mode B is selected, this indicates when the digital scanner should beep and turn on its LED after a decode.
Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters is selected,
all bar code data is send except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner. When Do Not Send Bar
Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character and then an error beep will
sound on the digital scanner.
*Normal Operation
(Beep/LED immediately after decode)
Beep/LED After Transmission
Beep/LED After CTS Pulse
*Send Bar Code
(with unknown characters)
Do Not Send Bar Codes
(with unknown characters)
RS-232 Interface 7-21
ASCII Character Set for RS-232
The values in Table 7-4 can be assigned as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission.
Table 7-4. Prefix/Suffix Values
Prefix/Suffix Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
1000 %U NUL
1001 $A SOH
1002 $B STX
1003 $C ETX
1004 $D EOT
1005 $E ENQ
1006 $F ACK
1007 $G BELL
1008 $H BCKSPC
1009 $I HORIZ TAB
1010 $J LF/NW LN
1011 $K VT
1012 $L FF
1013 $M CR/ENTER
1014 $N SO
1015 $O SI
1016 $P DLE
1017 $Q DC1/XON
1018 $R DC2
1019 $S DC3/XOFF
1020 $T DC4
1021 $U NAK
1022 $V SYN
1023 $W ETB
1024 $X CAN
1025 $Y EM
1026 $Z SUB
1027 %A ESC
1028 %B FS
1029 %C GS
1030 %D RS
1031 %E US
1032 Space Space
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide7-22
1033 /A !
1034 /B "
1035 /C #
1036 /D $
1037 /E %
1038 /F &
1039 /G ‘
1040 /H (
1041 /I )
1042 /J *
1043 /K +
1044 /L ,
1045 --
1046 ..
1047 /O /
1048 00
1049 11
1050 22
1051 33
1052 44
1053 55
1054 66
1055 77
1056 88
1057 99
1058 /Z :
1059 %F ;
1060 %G <
1061 %H =
1062 %I >
1063 %J ?
1064 %V @
1065 AA
1066 BB
1067 CC
Table 7-4. Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/Suffix Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
RS-232 Interface 7-23
1068 DD
1069 EE
1070 FF
1071 GG
1072 HH
1073 II
1074 JJ
1075 KK
1076 LL
1077 MM
1078 NN
1079 OO
1080 PP
1081 QQ
1082 RR
1083 SS
1084 TT
1085 UU
1086 VV
1087 WW
1088 XX
1089 YY
1090 ZZ
1091 %K [
1092 %L \
1093 %M ]
1094 %N ^
1095 %O _
1096 %W `
1097 +A a
1098 +B b
1099 +C c
1100 +D d
1101 +E e
1102 +F f
Table 7-4. Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/Suffix Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide7-24
1103 +G g
1104 +H h
1105 +I i
1106 +J j
1107 +K k
1108 +L l
1109 +M m
1110 +N n
1111 +O o
1112 +P p
1113 +Q q
1114 +R r
1115 +S s
1116 +T t
1117 +U u
1118 +V v
1119 +W w
1120 +X x
1121 +Y y
1122 +Z z
1123 %P {
1124 %Q |
1125 %R }
1126 %S ~
1127 Undefined
7013 ENTER
Table 7-4. Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/Suffix Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
USB Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Connecting a USB Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
USB Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
USB Host Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
USB Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
USB Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
USB CAPS Lock Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
USB Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Emulate Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Simulated Caps Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Convert Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
ASCII Character Set for USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide8-2
USB Interface 8-3
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with a USB host. The digital scanner connects directly to a USB host, or a
powered USB hub, and is powered by it. No additional power supply is required.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure
to set the document magnification to a level where the bar code can be seen clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not
merging.
Connecting a USB Interface
Figure 8-1. USB Connection
The digital scanner connects with USB-capable hosts including:
• Desktop PCs and notebooks
• Apple™ iMac, G4, iBooks (North America only)
• IBM SurePOS terminals
• Sun, IBM, and other network computers that support more than one keyboard.
The following operating systems support the digital scanner through USB:
•Windows
® 98, 2000, ME, XP
• MacOS 8.5 and above
• IBM 4690 OS.
The digital scanner also interfaces with other USB hosts which support USB Human Interface Devices (HID). For more information on
USB technology, hosts, and peripheral devices, visit www.symbol.com/usb.
*North American Standard USB Keyboard Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
Note
USB Series A Connector
Interface Cable
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide8-4
To set up the digital scanner:
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 8-1 are examples only.
The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the
same.
1. Connect the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner (see Installing
the Interface Cable on page 1-4).
2. Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of the IBM SurePOS
terminal.
3. Select the USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from USB Device Type on page 8-5.
4. On first installation when using Windows, the software prompts to select or install the Human Interface Device driver. To
install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the last choice. The digital
scanner powers up during this installation.
5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 3-3.
USB Parameter Defaults
Table 8-1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter
Descriptions section beginning on page 8-5.
See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 8-1. USB Host Default Table
Parameter Default Page Number
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation 8-5
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) North American 8-6
USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 8-8
USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 8-8
USB Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 8-9
Emulate Keypad Disable 8-9
USB FN1 Substitution Disable 8-10
Function Key Mapping Disable 8-10
Simulated Caps Lock Disable 8-11
Convert Case None 8-11
Note
Note
USB Interface 8-5
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type
Select the desired USB device type.
When changing USB Device Types, the digital scanner automatically resets. The digital scanner issues the
standard startup beep sequences.
*HID Keyboard Emulation
IBM Table Top USB
IBM Hand-Held USB
USB OPOS Handheld
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide8-6
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)
Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. This setting applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device.
When changing USB country keyboard types the digital scanner automatically resets. The digital scanner
issues the standard startup beep sequences.
*North American Standard USB Keyboard
German Windows
French Windows
French Canadian Windows 95/98
French Canadian Windows 2000/XP
Note
USB Interface 8-7
USB Country Keyboard Types (continued)
Spanish Windows
Italian Windows
Swedish Windows
UK English Windows
Japanese Windows (ASCII)
Portuguese-Brazilian Windows
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide8-8
USB Keystroke Delay
This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts
require a slower transmission of data.
USB CAPS Lock Override
This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device. When enabled, the case of the data is preserved regardless of the
state of the caps lock key. This setting is always enabled for the Japanese, Windows (ASCII) keyboard type and can not be disabled.
*No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
Override Caps Lock Key
(Enable)
*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key
(Disable)
USB Interface 8-9
USB Ignore Unknown Characters
This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device. Unknown characters are characters the host does not
recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters,
and no error beeps sound. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar codes containing at least
one unknown character are not sent to the host, and an error beep sounds.
Emulate Keypad
When enabled, all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example ASCII A would be sent as “ALT
make” 0 6 5 “ALT Break”.
*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
(Transmit)
Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
(Disable)
*Disable Keypad Emulation
Enable Keypad Emulation
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide8-10
USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution
This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device. When enabled, this allows replacement of any FN 1 characters
in an EAN 128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user (see FN1 Substitution Values on page 14-8 to set the Key
Category and Key Value).
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequences (see Table 8-2 on page 8-12). When this parameter is enabled,
the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether
or not this parameter is enabled.
Enable
*Disable
*Disable Function Key Mapping
Enable Function Key Mapping
USB Interface 8-11
Simulated Caps Lock
When enabled, the digital scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on
the keyboard. This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state.
Convert Case
When enabled, the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case.
*Disable Simulated Caps Lock
Enable Simulated Caps Lock
*No Case Conversion
Convert All to Upper Case
Convert All to Lower Case
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide8-12
ASCII Character Set for USB
Table 8-2. USB Prefix/Suffix Values
Prefix/ Suffix Value
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1000 %U CTRL 2
1001 $A CTRL A
1002 $B CTRL B
1003 $C CTRL C
1004 $D CTRL D
1005 $E CTRL E
1006 $F CTRL F
1007 $G CTRL G
1008 $H CTRL H/BACKSPACE1
1009 $I CTRL I/HORIZONTAL
TAB1
1010 $J CTRL J
1011 $K CTRL K
1012 $L CTRL L
1013 $M CTRL M/ENTER1
1014 $N CTRL N
1015 $O CTRL O
1016 $P CTRL P
1017 $Q CTRL Q
1018 $R CTRL R
1019 $S CTRL S
1020 $T CTRL T
1021 $U CTRL U
1022 $V CTRL V
1023 $W CTRL W
1024 $X CTRL X
1025 $Y CTRL Y
1026 $Z CTRL Z
1027 %A CTRL [/ESC1
1028 %B CTRL \
1029 %C CTRL ]
1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise,
the unbolded keystroke is sent.
USB Interface 8-13
1030 %D CTRL 6
1031 %E CTRL -
1032 Space Space
1033 /A !
1034 /B “
1035 /C #
1036 /D $
1037 /E %
1038 /F &
1039 /G ‘
1040 /H (
1041 /I )
1042 /J *
1043 /K +
1044 /L ,
1045 - -
1046 . .
1047 /O /
1048 0 0
1049 1 1
1050 2 2
1051 3 3
1052 4 4
1053 5 5
1054 6 6
1055 7 7
1056 8 8
1057 9 9
1058 /Z :
1059 %F ;
1060 %G <
1061 %H =
1062 %I >
Table 8-2. USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/ Suffix Value
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise,
the unbolded keystroke is sent.
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide8-14
1063 %J ?
1064 %V @
1065 A A
1066 B B
1067 C C
1068 D D
1069 E E
1070 F F
1071 G G
1072 H H
1073 I I
1074 J J
1075 K K
1076 L L
1077 M M
1078 N N
1079 O O
1080 P P
1081 Q Q
1082 R R
1083 S S
1084 T T
1085 U U
1086 V V
1087 W W
1088 X X
1089 Y Y
1090 Z Z
1091 %K [
1092 %L \
1093 %M ]
1094 %N ^
1095 %O _
Table 8-2. USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/ Suffix Value
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise,
the unbolded keystroke is sent.
USB Interface 8-15
1096 %W `
1097 +A a
1098 +B b
1099 +C c
1100 +D d
1101 +E e
1102 +F f
1103 +G g
1104 +H h
1105 +I i
1106 +J j
1107 +K k
1108 +L l
1109 +M m
1110 +N n
1111 +O o
1112 +P p
1113 +Q q
1114 +R r
1115 +S s
1116 +T t
1117 +U u
1118 +V v
1119 +W w
1120 +X x
1121 +Y y
1122 +Z z
1123 %P {
1124 %Q |
1125 %R }
1126 %S ~
Table 8-2. USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/ Suffix Value
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise,
the unbolded keystroke is sent.
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide8-16
Table 8-3. USB ALT Key Character Set
ALT Keys Keystroke
2064 ALT 2
2065 ALT A
2066 ALT B
2067 ALT C
2068 ALT D
2069 ALT E
2070 ALT F
2071 ALT G
2072 ALT H
2073 ALT I
2074 ALT J
2075 ALT K
2076 ALT L
2077 ALT M
2078 ALT N
2079 ALT O
2080 ALT P
2081 ALT Q
2082 ALT R
2083 ALT S
2084 ALT T
2085 ALT U
2086 ALT V
2087 ALT W
2088 ALT X
2089 ALT Y
2090 ALT Z
USB Interface 8-17
Table 8-4. USB GUI Key Character Set
GUI Key Keystroke
3000 Right Control Key
3048 GUI 0
3049 GUI 1
3050 GUI 2
3051 GUI 3
3052 GUI 4
3053 GUI 5
3054 GUI 6
3055 GUI 7
3056 GUI 8
3057 GUI 9
3065 GUI A
3066 GUI B
3067 GUI C
3068 GUI D
3069 GUI E
3070 GUI F
3071 GUI G
3072 GUI H
3073 GUI I
3074 GUI J
3075 GUI K
3076 GUI L
3077 GUI M
3078 GUI N
3079 GUI O
3080 GUI P
3081 GUI Q
3082 GUI R
3083 GUI S
3084 GUI T
3085 GUI U
3086 GUI V
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space
bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the
right ALT key.
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide8-18
3087 GUI W
3088 GUI X
3089 GUI Y
3090 GUI Z
Table 8-5. USB F Key Character Set
F Keys Keystroke
5001 F1
5002 F2
5003 F3
5004 F4
5005 F5
5006 F6
5007 F7
5008 F8
5009 F9
5010 F10
5011 F11
5012 F12
5013 F13
5014 F14
5015 F15
5016 F16
5017 F17
5018 F18
5019 F19
5020 F20
5021 F21
5022 F22
5023 F23
5024 F24
Table 8-4. USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Key Keystroke
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space
bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the
right ALT key.
USB Interface 8-19
Table 8-6. USB Numeric Keypad Character Set
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
6042 *
6043 +
6044 undefined
6045 -
6046 .
6047 /
6048 0
6049 1
6050 2
6051 3
6052 4
6053 5
6054 6
6055 7
6056 8
6057 9
6058 Enter
6059 Num Lock
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide8-20
Table 8-7. USB Extended Keypad Character Set
Extended Keypad Keystroke
7001 Break
7002 Delete
7003 PgUp
7004 End
7005 Pg Dn
7006 Pause
7007 Scroll Lock
7008 Backspace
7009 Tab
7010 Print Screen
7011 Insert
7012 Home
7013 Enter
7014 Escape
7015 Up Arrow
7016 Down Arrow
7017 Left Arrow
7018 Right Arrow
IBM 468X/469X Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
IBM Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Port Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Convert Unknown to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide9-2
IBM 468X/469X Interface 9-3
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with an IBM 468X/469X host.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where the bar code can be seen clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.
Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host
This connection is made directly from the digital scanner to the host interface.
Figure 9-1. IBM Direct Connection
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 9-1 are examples only.
The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the
same.
1. Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner (see
Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4).
2. Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (typically Port 9).
3. Select the port address by scanning the appropriate bar code from Port Address on page 9-5.
4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
*Disable Convert to Code 39 Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
Note
Host Port Connector
Interface Cable
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide9-4
The only required configuration is the port address. Other digital scanner parameters are typically controlled
by the IBM system.
IBM Parameter Defaults
Table 9-1 lists the defaults for IBM host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter
Descriptions section beginning on page 9-5.
See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 9-1. IBM Host Default Table
Parameter Default Page Number
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address None Selected 9-5
Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 9-6
Note
Note
IBM 468X/469X Interface 9-5
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address
This parameter sets the IBM 468X/469X port used.
Scanning one of these bar codes enables the RS-485 interface on the digital scanner.
None Selected
Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)
Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)
Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide9-6
Convert Unknown to Code 39
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of unknown bar code type data to Code 39.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
*Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39
Wand Emulation Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Connecting Using Wand Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Wand Emulation Host Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Wand Emulation Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Leading Margin (Quiet Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide10-2
Wand Emulation Interface 10-3
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with a wand emulation host when Wand Emulation communication is needed.
The digital scanner connects to an external wand decoder or to a decoder integrated in a mobile computer or Point-of-Sale (POS)
terminal.
In this mode the digital scanner emulates the signal of a digital wand to make it "readable" by a wand decoder.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure
to set the document magnification to a level where the bar code can be seen clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not
merging.
Connecting Using Wand Emulation
To perform Wand Emulation, connect the digital scanner to a mobile computer, or a controller which collects the wand data and
interprets it for the host.
Figure 10-1. Wand Emulation Connection
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 10-1 are examples
only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain
the same.
*Transmit Unknown
Characters Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
Note
Wand Port Interface Cable
Mobile Computer
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide10-4
1. Attach the modular connector of the Wand Emulation interface cable to cable interface port on the digital scanner (see
Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4).
2. Connect the other end of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the wand port on the mobile computer or controller.
3. Select the Wand Emulation host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Wand Emulation Host Types on page 10-5.
4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
Connect the digital scanner to 5 volt decoders only. Connecting the digital scanner to a 12 volt
decoder can damage the digital scanner and invalidate the warranty.
Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults
Table 10-1 lists the defaults for Wand Emulation host types. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in Wand
Emulation Host Parameters on page 10-5.
See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 10-1. Wand Emulation Default Table
Parameter Default Page Number
Wand Emulation Host Parameters
Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface
Controller
10-5
Leading Margin 80 msec 10-6
Polarity Bar High/Margin Low 10-7
Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore 10-7
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 10-8
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable 10-9
WARNING
Note
Wand Emulation Interface 10-5
Wand Emulation Host Parameters
Wand Emulation Host Types
Select a Wand Emulation host by scanning one of the bar codes below.
Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller
Symbol PDT Terminal (MSI)
Symbol PTC Terminal (Telxon)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide10-6
Leading Margin (Quiet Zone)
Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration. A leading margin is the time that precedes the first bar of the scan, (in
milliseconds). The minimum allowed value is 80 msec and the maximum is 250 msec. This parameter accommodates older wand
decoders which cannot handle short leading margins.
250 msec is the maximum value that this parameter can attain, however, 200 msec is sufficient.
*80 msec
140 msec
200 msec
Note
Wand Emulation Interface 10-7
Polarity
Polarity determines how the digital scanner's Wand Emulation interface creates the Digitized Barcode Pattern (DBP). DBP is a digital
signal that represents the scanned bar code. Different decoders expect the DBP to be in a certain format. The DBP either has the
"highs" represent bars and the "lows" represent spaces (margins), or the "highs" represent spaces (margins) and the "lows" represent
bars.
Scan the appropriate bar code to select the polarity required by the decoder.
Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected,
all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner. When Do Not Send Bar
Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the host, and
the digital scanner emits an error beep.
*Bar High/Margin Low
Bar Low/Margin High
*Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
(Transmit)
Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
(Do Not Transmit)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide10-8
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39
By default, the Wand Emulation interface sends data to the attached host in the same symbology that was decoded. This can be a
problem for customers with older systems that do not recognize newer symbologies (for example, RSS).
Enabling this parameter ignores the original symbology decoded, and outputs the data as if it were a Code 39 bar code. Any lowercase
characters in the original data stream are transmitted as uppercase characters. This also allows ADF Formatting.
If Ignore Unknown Characters is enabled, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology
set are replaced by a space.
If Ignore Unknown Characters is disabled, if any characters that do not have a corresponding Code 39 character are encountered,
the digital scanner emits an error beep and no data is transmitted.
ADF Note: By default, the Wand Emulation interface does not allow scanned data to be processed by ADF
rules. Enabling this parameter allows the scanned data to be processed by ADF rules (Chapter 15, Advanced
Data Formatting).
Enable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host
*Disable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host
Note
Wand Emulation Interface 10-9
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII
By default, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space. If this
parameter is enabled, the data sent to the wand Interface is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII. This setting requires that the Host be
able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data.
This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled.
*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
Enable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide10-10
Scanner Emulation Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Connecting Using Scanner Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-4
Scanner Emulation Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
Scanner Emulation Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
Beep Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
Parameter Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
Convert Newer Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
Module Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Transmission Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Leading Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11
Check For Decode LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide11-2
Scanner Emulation Interface 11-3
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with a Scanner Emulation host. Use this mode when Scanner Emulation
communication is needed. In this mode, the digital scanner connects to an external decoder or to a decoder integrated in a mobile
computer or Point-of-Sale (POS) terminal.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure
to set the document magnification to a level where the bar code can be seen clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not
merging.
Connecting Using Scanner Emulation
To perform Scanner Emulation, connect the digital scanner to a mobile computer, or a controller which collects the data and interprets
it for the host.
Figure 11-1. Scanner Emulation Connection
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 11-1 are examples
only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain
the same.
1. Attach the modular connector of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner (see
Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4).
2. Connect the other end of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the scanner port on the mobile computer or controller.
*Parameter Process and
Pass-Through Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
Note
Host Port Connector
Interface Cable
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide11-4
3. Scan the Scanner Emulation Host bar code from Scanner Emulation Host on page 11-6 to enable the Scanner Emulation host
interface.
4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
Connect the digital scanner to 5 volt decoders only. Connecting the digital scanner to a 12 volt
decoder can damage the digital scanner and invalidate the warranty.
Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults
Table 11-1 lists the defaults for the Scanner Emulation host. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the
Scanner Emulation Host Parameters section beginning on page 11-6.
See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
WARNING
Note
Scanner Emulation Interface 11-5
Table 11-1. Scanner Emulation Default Table
Parameter Default Page Number
Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit 11-6
Parameter Pass-Through Parameter Process and Pass
Through
11-7
Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types 11-7
Module Width 20 µs 11-8
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert to Bar Codes
to Code 39
11-8
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 11-9
Transmission Timeout 3 seconds 11-9
Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters 11-10
Leading Margin 2 ms 11-11
Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED 11-12
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide11-6
Scanner Emulation Host
Scan the bar code below to enable the Scanner Emulation host.
Scanner Emulation Host Parameters
Beep Style
The Scanner Emulation host supports three beep styles.
•Beep On Successful Transmit: The digital scanner beeps when the attached decoder issues the decode signal to the
digital scanner, so the digital scanner and the attached decoder beep at the same time.
•Beep At Decode Time: The digital scanner beeps upon decode. This results in a double beep sequence from most
decoders, since the digital scanner beeps, and the decoder beeps (at a different frequency) when it successfully decodes the
output.
•Do Not Beep: Only the attached decoder issues the decode beep.
In all cases, if an error occurs, the digital scanner issues error beeps.
Scanner Emulation Host
*Beep On Successful Transmit
Beep At Decode Time
Do Not Beep
Scanner Emulation Interface 11-7
Parameter Pass-Through
The Scanner Emulation host can process parameter bar code messages and send them to the attached decoder. In this way, customers
using Symbol compliant decoders can control the behavior of the entire system by scanning the necessary parameters only once.
For example, to enable D 2 of 5, scan the D 2 of 5 Enable parameter bar code. The digital scanner and the attached decoder both
process the parameter.
Convert Newer Code Types
The digital scanner supports a variety of code types that are not decodable by attached decoder systems. To allow compatibility in
these environments, the digital scanner converts these code types to more commonly decodable symbologies, as per the following
chart. Symbologies not listed on this chart are transmitted normally.
When decoding these code types with this parameter disabled, the digital scanner issues Convert Error beeps and transmits no data.
*Parameter Process and Pass-Through
Parameter Process Only
Scan this code type: Transmitted as:
Code 11 Code 39
RSS (14, Limited, and Expanded), Coupon Code, PDF,
MicroPDF, MaxiCode, DataMatrix, QR Code, Postal
Codes, Composite Codes
Code 128
*Convert Newer Code Types
Reject Newer Code Types
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide11-8
Module Width
The standard module width is 20 µs. For an extremely slow decoder system, select 50 µs Module Width.
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of all bar code data to Code 39.
*20 µs Module Width
50 µs Module Width
*Do Not Convert Bar Codes To Code 39
Convert All To Code 39
Scanner Emulation Interface 11-9
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
By default, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space. If this
parameter is enabled, the data sent to the Scanner Emulation host is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII. The host must be able to interpret
Code 39 Full ASCII data.
This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled.
Transmission Timeout
The Scanner Emulation host transmits bar code data to the attached decoder and waits for the decoder to assert the Decode signal,
indicating successful transmission. If, after a specified amount of time, the Decode signal is not asserted (indicating that the attached
decoder has not successfully received the bar code data), the digital scanner issues transmit error beeps.
Scan the appropriate bar code below to select the desired transmission timeout.
*Disable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII
Enable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII
*3 Second Transmission Timeout
4 Second Transmission Timeout
5 Second Transmission Timeout
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide11-10
Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the decoder does not recognize. When Ignore Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code
data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When Convert Error on Unknown Characters is selected,
bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the decoder, and a convert error beep sounds.
Transmission Timeout (continued)
10 Second Transmission Timeout
30 Second Transmission Timeout
*Ignore Unknown Characters
Convert Error On Unknown Characters
Scanner Emulation Interface 11-11
Leading Margin
Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration.
1 ms Leading Margin
*2 ms Leading Margin
3 ms Leading Margin
5 ms Leading Margin
10 ms Leading Margin
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide11-12
Check For Decode LED
The attached decoder normally asserts the Decode line to signal to the Scanner Emulation host that it successfully decoded the
transmitted bar code. Some decoders, however, do not assert the Decode signal. In this case, the digital scanner emits transmit error
beeps to indicate that the bar code was not successfully transmitted. Scan the Ignore Decode LED bar code to disable the Transmit
Error beeps.
*Check For Decode LED
Ignore Decode LED
123 Scan
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Communication with 123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
123Scan Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
DS 3408 Product Reference Guid12-2
123 Scan 12-3
Introduction
123Scan is a Windows®-based utility that programs the digital scanner with all parameters including Advanced Data Formatting
(ADF) Rules. An ADF rule modifies bar code data before it is sent to the host to ensure compatibility between bar coded data and the
host application. Digital scanners can be programmed via PC download or by scanning a sheet of bar codes generated by the utility.
Digital scanner programming is saved in a file for electronic distribution. The 123Scan program includes a help file.
Communication with 123Scan
To communicate with the 123Scan program which runs on a host computer running a Windows operating system, use an RS-232 cable
to connect the digital scanner to the host computer (see Connecting an RS-232 Interface on page 7-4).
123Scan requirements:
• Host computer with Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
• Digital scanner
• RS-232 cable.
123Scan Parameter
To communicate with the 123Scan program, load 123Scan, included in the documentation CD-ROM, onto the host computer, and scan
the bar code below. Refer to 123Scan instructions for programming the digital scanner.
Scan the bar code below to enable the 123Scan interface on the digital scanner.
123Scan Configuration
DS 3408 Product Reference Guid12-4
Symbologies
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Symbology Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
Enable/Disable UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
Enable/Disable UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
Enable/Disable UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Enable/Disable EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Enable/Disable EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-13
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-16
UPC-A Preamble. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-16
UPC-E Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-17
UPC-E1 Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-18
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-18
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-19
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-19
UCC Coupon Extended Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20
Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20
Enable/Disable Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-2
Enable/Disable UCC/EAN-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-21
Enable/Disable ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-21
Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-22
Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-22
Convert Code 39 to Code 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-23
Code 32 Prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-23
Set Lengths for Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-24
Code 39 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-25
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-26
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-26
Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-27
Code 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-29
Enable/Disable Code 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-29
Set Lengths for Code 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-30
Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-31
Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-31
Set Lengths for Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-32
Code 11 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-33
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-34
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-34
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-34
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-35
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-36
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-37
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-37
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-38
Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-38
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-38
Codabar (NW - 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-39
Enable/Disable Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-39
Set Lengths for Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-40
CLSI Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-41
NOTIS Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-41
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-42
Enable/Disable MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-42
Set Lengths for MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-42
MSI Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-43
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-44
MSI Check Digit Algorithm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-44
Postal Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-45
US Postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-45
US Planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-45
UK Postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-46
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-46
Japan Postal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-47
Australian Postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-47
Dutch Postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-48
Transmit US Postal Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-48
Symbologies 13-3
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-49
RSS-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-49
RSS Limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-49
RSS Expanded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-50
Convert RSS to UPC/EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-50
Composite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-51
Composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-51
Composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-51
Composite TLC-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-52
UPC Composite Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-53
Composite Beep Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-54
UCC/EAN Code 128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-54
2D Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-55
Enable/Disable PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-55
Enable/Disable MicroPDF417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-55
Code 128 Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-56
Data Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-57
Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-57
QR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-58
Redundancy Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-59
Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-61
Intercharacter Gap Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-62
Report Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-62
Macro PDF Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-63
Flush Macro Buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-63
Abort Macro PDF Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-63
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-4
Symbologies 13-5
Introduction
This chapter describes symbology features and provides the programming bar codes for selecting these features. Before
programming, follow the instructions in Chapter 1, Getting Started.
The digital scanner is shipped with the settings shown in the Symbology Default Table on page 13-6 (also see Appendix A, Standard
Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not
necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are
preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down.
Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where the bar code can be seen clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.
If not using a Synapse or USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the
power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, scan the *Set All Defaults bar code on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar code menus,
default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit bar code data without the UPC-A check digit,
simply scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit bar code under Transmit UPC-A Check Digit on page 13-15. The digital scanner
issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 require scanning several bar codes. See the individual parameter, such as Set
Length(s) for D 2 of 5, for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Note
*Enable UPC-A Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-6
Symbology Parameter Defaults
Table 13-1 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the
Symbologies Parameters section beginning on 13-10.
See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 13-1. Symbology Default Table
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
UPC/EAN
UPC-A 01h Enable 13-10
UPC-E 02h Enable 13-10
UPC-E1 0Ch Disable 13-11
EAN-8/JAN 8 04h Enable 13-11
EAN-13/JAN 13 03h Enable 13-12
Bookland EAN 53h Disable 13-12
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits) 10h Ignore 13-13
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 50h 10 13-14
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit 28h Enable 13-15
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit 29h Enable 13-15
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit 2Ah Enable 13-16
UPC-A Preamble 22h System Character 13-16
UPC-E Preamble 23h System Character 13-16
UPC-E1 Preamble 24h System Character 13-18
Convert UPC-E to A 25h Disable 13-19
Convert UPC-E1 to A 26h Disable 13-19
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend 27h Disable 13-19
UCC Coupon Extended Code 55h Disable 13-20
Code 128
Code 128 08h Enable 13-20
UCC/EAN-128 0Eh Enable 13-21
ISBT 128 54h Enable 13-21
Note
Symbologies 13-7
Code 39
Code 39 00h Enable 13-22
Trioptic Code 39 0Dh Disable 13-22
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) 56h Disable 13-23
Code 32 Prefix E7h Disable 13-23
Set Length(s) for Code 39 12h 13h 2 to 55 13-24
Code 39 Check Digit Verification 30h Disable 13-25
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 2Bh Disable 13-26
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 11h Disable 13-26
Buffer Code 39 71h Disable 13-27
Code 93
Code 93 09h Disable 13-29
Set Length(s) for Code 93 1Ah 1Bh 4 to 55 13-30
Code 11
Code 11 0Ah Disable 13-31
Set Lengths for Code 11 1Ch 1Dh 4 to 55 13-32
Code 11 Check Digit Verification 34h Disable 13-33
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) 2Fh Disable 13-34
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 06h Enable 13-34
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 16h 17h 14 13-35
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 31h Disable 13-36
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit 2Ch Disable 13-37
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 52h Disable 13-37
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Discrete 2 of 5 05h Disable 13-38
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 14h 15h 12 13-38
Table 13-1. Symbology Default Table (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-8
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar 07h Disable 13-39
Set Lengths for Codabar 18h 19h 5 to 55 13-40
CLSI Editing 36h Disable 13-41
NOTIS Editing 37h Disable 13-41
MSI
MSI 0Bh Disable 13-42
Set Length(s) for MSI 1Eh 1Fh 1 to 55 13-42
MSI Check Digits 32h One 13-43
Transmit MSI Check Digit 2Eh Disable 13-44
MSI Check Digit Algorithm 33h Mod 10/Mod 10 13-44
Postal Codes
US Postnet 59h Enable 13-45
US Planet 5Ah Enable 13-45
UK Postal 5Bh Enable 13-46
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 60h Enable 13-46
Japan Postal F0h 22h Enable 13-47
Australian Postal F0h 23h Enable 13-47
Dutch Postal F0h 46h Enable 13-48
Transmit US Postal Check Digit 5Fh Enable 13-48
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology)
RSS 14 F0h 52h Enable 13-49
RSS Limited F0h 53h Enable 13-49
RSS Expanded F0h 54h Enable 13-50
Convert RSS to UPC/EAN F0h 8Dh Disable 13-50
Composite
Composite CC-C F0h 55h Disable 13-51
Composite CC-A/B F0h 56h Disable 13-51
Table 13-1. Symbology Default Table (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
Symbologies 13-9
Composite TLC-39 F0h 73h Disable 13-52
UPC Composite Mode F0h 58h Always Linked 13-53
Composite Beep Mode F0h 8Eh Beep As Each Code Type is
Decoded
13-54
UCC/EAN Code 128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN
Composite Codes
F0h ABh Disable 13-54
2D Symbologies
PDF417 0Fh Enable 13-55
MicroPDF417 E3h Disable 13-55
Code 128 Emulation 7Bh Disable 13-56
Data Matrix F0h 24h Enable 13-57
Maxicode F0h 26h Enable 13-57
QR Code F0h 25h Enable 13-58
Symbology-Specific Security Levels
Redundancy Level 4Eh 1 13-59
Security Level 4Dh 0 13-61
Intercharacter Gap Size F0h 7Dh Normal 13-62
Report Version 13-62
Macro PDF
Flush Macro PDF Buffer 13-63
Abort Macro PDF Entry 13-63
Table 13-1. Symbology Default Table (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-10
UPC/EAN
Enable/Disable UPC-A
Parameter # 01h
To enable or disable UPC-A, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable UPC-E
Parameter # 02h
To enable or disable UPC-E, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable UPC-A
(01h)
Disable UPC-A
(00h)
*Enable UPC-E
(01h)
Disable UPC-E
(00h)
Symbologies 13-11
Enable/Disable UPC-E1
Parameter # 0Ch
UPC-E1 is disabled by default.
To enable or disable UPC-E1, scan the appropriate bar code below.
UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.
Enable/Disable EAN-8/JAN-8
Parameter # 04h
To enable or disable EAN-8/JAN-8, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable UPC-E1
(01h)
*Disable UPC-E1
(00h)
*Enable EAN-8/JAN-8
(01h)
Disable EAN-8/JAN-8
(00h)
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-12
Enable/Disable EAN-13/JAN-13
Parameter # 03h
To enable or disable EAN-13/JAN-13, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN
Parameter # 53h
To enable or disable Bookland EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable EAN-13/JAN-13
(01h)
Disable EAN-13/JAN-13
(00h)
Enable Bookland EAN
(01h)
*Disable Bookland EAN
(00h)
Symbologies 13-13
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
Parameter # 10h
Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2, EAN 13+2). Six options are
available.
•If Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Only With Supplementals is selected, UPC/EAN/JAN symbols without supplementals are not
decoded.
•If Ignore Supplementals is selected, and the digital scanner is presented with a UPC/EAN/JAN with a
supplemental, the UPC/EAN/JAN is decoded and the supplemental bar code is ignored.
•An Autodiscriminate Option is also available. If this option is selected, choose an appropriate UPC/EAN/JAN
Supplemental Redundancy value from the next page. A value of 5 or more is recommended.
•Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode to delay only EAN-13/JAN-13 bar codes starting with a ‘378’ or ‘379’ prefix by the
supplemental search process. All other UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes are exempt from the search and are reported instantly upon
decode.
• Select Enable 978 Supplemental Mode to delay only EAN-13/JAN-13 bar codes starting with a ‘978’ prefix by the
supplemental search process. All other UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes are exempt from the search and are reported instantly upon
decode.
• Select Enable Smart Supplemental Mode to delay only EAN-13/JAN-13 bar codes starting with a ‘378’, ‘379’, or ‘978’
prefix by the supplemental search process. All other UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes are exempt from the search and are reported
instantly upon decode.
To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental characters.
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Only With Supplementals
(01h)
*Ignore Supplementals
(00h)
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
(02h)
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-14
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
Parameter # 50h
With Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals selected, this option adjusts the number of times a symbol without
supplementals is decoded before transmission. The range is from two to thirty times. Five or above is recommended when decoding
a mix of UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with and without supplementals, and the autodiscriminate option is selected. The default is set at 10.
Scan the bar code below to set a decode redundancy value. Next, scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes.
Single digit numbers must have a leading zero. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode
(04h)
Enable 978 Supplemental Mode
(05h)
Enable Smart Supplemental Mode
(03h)
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
Symbologies 13-15
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
Parameter # 28h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to
transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
Parameter # 29h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to
transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
(01h)
Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
(00h)
*Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
(01h)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-16
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
Parameter # 2Ah
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to
transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
UPC-A Preamble
Parameter # 22h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are three options for
transmitting a UPC-A preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (“0”
for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to match the host system.
*Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
(01h)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
(00h)
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(00h)
*System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(01h)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(02h)
Symbologies 13-17
UPC-E Preamble
Parameter # 23h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are three options for
transmitting a UPC-E preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (“0”
for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to match the host system.
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(00h)
*System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(01h)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(02h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-18
UPC-E1 Preamble
Parameter # 24h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are three options for
transmitting a UPC-E1 preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (“0”
for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to match the host system.
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
Parameter # 25h
Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows
UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
When disabled, UPC-E decoded data is transmitted as UPC-E data, without conversion.
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(00h)
*System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(01h)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(02h)
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Disable)
(00h)
Symbologies 13-19
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
Parameter # 26h
Enable this to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format
and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
When disabled, UPC-E1 decoded data is transmitted as UPC-E1 data, without conversion.
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend
Parameter # 27h
When enabled, this parameter adds five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them compatible in format to EAN-13
symbols.
When disabled, EAN-8 symbols are transmitted as is.
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable)
(00h)
Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
(01h)
*Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-20
UCC Coupon Extended Code
Parameter # 55h
When enabled, this parameter decodes UPC-A bar codes starting with digit ‘5’, EAN-13 bar codes starting with digit ‘99’, and UPC-
A/EAN-128 Coupon Codes. UPCA, EAN-13, and EAN-128 must be enabled to scan all types of Coupon Codes.
Use the Decode UPC/EAN Supplemental Redundancy parameter to control autodiscrimination of the
EAN128 (right half) of a coupon code.
Code 128
Enable/Disable Code 128
Parameter # 08h
To enable or disable Code 128, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code
(01h)
*Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code
(00h)
*Enable Code 128
(01h)
Disable Code 128
(00h)
Note
Symbologies 13-21
Enable/Disable UCC/EAN-128
Parameter # 0Eh
To enable or disable UCC/EAN-128, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable ISBT 128
Parameter # 54h
ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan a bar code below to enable or disable ISBT 128. If necessary,
the host must perform concatenation of the ISBT data.
*Enable UCC/EAN-128
(01h)
Disable UCC/EAN-128
(00h)
*Enable ISBT 128
(01h)
Disable ISBT 128
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-22
Code 39
Enable/Disable Code 39
Parameter # 00h
To enable or disable Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39
Parameter # 0Dh
Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six
characters. To enable or disable Trioptic Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII cannot be enabled simultaneously.
*Enable Code 39
(01h)
Disable Code 39
(00h)
Enable Trioptic Code 39
(01h)
*Disable Trioptic Code 39
(00h)
Note
Symbologies 13-23
Convert Code 39 to Code 32
Parameter # 56h
Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable
converting Code 39 to Code 32.
Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Code 32 Prefix
Parameter # E7h
Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character “A” to all Code 32 bar codes.
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(01h)
*Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(00h)
Enable Code 32 Prefix
(01h)
*Disable Code 32 Prefix
(00h)
Note
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-24
Set Lengths for Code 39
Parameter # L1 = 12h, L2 = 13h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains.
Set lengths for Code 39 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled,
Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred options.
When setting lengths for different bar code types by scanning single digit numbers, single digit numbers
must always be preceded by a leading zero.
•One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14
characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or change the selection,
scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two selected lengths.
Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those Code 39
symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 39 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths
using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 39 symbols containing
between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 39 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers
must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Any Length - Select this option to decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner
capability.
Code 39 - One Discrete Length
Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths
Note
Symbologies 13-25
Set Lengths for Code 39 (continued)
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 30h
When this feature is enabled, the digital scanner checks the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with
specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded. Enable this feature if the
Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit.
Code 39 - Length Within Range
Code 39 - Any Length
Enable Code 39 Check Digit
(01h)
*Disable Code 39 Check Digit
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-26
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
Parameter # 2Bh
Scan a bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.
Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
Parameter # 11h
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. To enable or disable Code 39
Full ASCII, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII cannot be enabled simultaneously.
Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent, and is therefore described in the ASCII
Character Set Table for the appropriate interface. See the ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge on page
6-15, the ASCII Character Set for USB on page 8-12, or the ASCII Character Set for RS-232 on page 7-21.
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Disable)
(00h)
Enable Code 39 Full ASCII
(01h)
*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII
(00h)
Note
Note
Symbologies 13-27
Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store)
Parameter # 71h
This feature allows the digital scanner to accumulate data from multiple Code 39 symbols.
Selecting the Scan and Store option (Buffer Code 39) temporarily buffers all Code 39 symbols having a leading space as a first
character for later transmission. The leading space is not buffered.
Decode of a valid Code 39 symbol with no leading space causes transmission in sequence of all buffered data in a first-in first-out
format, plus transmission of the “triggering” symbol. See the following pages for further details.
When the Do Not Buffer Code 39 option is selected, all decoded Code 39 symbols are transmitted immediately without being
stored in the buffer.
This feature affects Code 39 only. If selecting Buffer Code 39, we recommend configuring the digital scanner to decode Code 39
symbology only.
While there is data in the transmission buffer, selecting Do Not Buffer Code 39 is not allowed. The buffer holds 200 bytes of
information.
To disable Code 39 buffering when there is data in the transmission buffer, first force the buffer transmission (see Transmit Buffer on
page 13-28) or clear the buffer.
Buffer Data
To buffer data, Code 39 buffering must be enabled and a Code 39 symbol must be read with a space immediately following the start
pattern.
• Unless the data overflows the transmission buffer, the digital scanner issues a lo/hi beep to indicate successful decode and
buffering. (For overflow conditions, see Overfilling Transmission Buffer.)
• The digital scanner adds the decoded data excluding the leading space to the transmission buffer.
• No transmission occurs.
Buffer Code 39 (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Buffer Code 39 (Disable)
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-28
Clear Transmission Buffer
To clear the transmission buffer, scan the Clear Buffer bar code below, which contains only a start character, a dash (minus), and a
stop character.
• The digital scanner issues a short hi/lo/hi beep.
• The digital scanner erases the transmission buffer.
• No transmission occurs.
The Clear Buffer contains only the dash (minus) character. In order to scan this command, be sure Code 39
length is set to include length 1.
Transmit Buffer
There are two methods to transmit the Code 39 buffer.
1. Scan the Transmit Buffer bar code below. Only a start character, a plus (+), and a stop character.
• The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer.
• The digital scanner issues a Lo/Hi beep.
2. Scan a Code 39 bar code with a leading character other than a space.
• The digital scanner appends new decode data to buffered data.
• The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer.
• The digital scanner signals that the buffer was transmitted with a lo/hi beep.
• The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer.
The Transmit Buffer contains only a plus (+) character. In order to scan this command, be sure Code 39 length
is set to include length 1.
Clear Buffer
Transmit Buffer
Note
Note
Symbologies 13-29
Overfilling Transmission Buffer
The Code 39 buffer holds 200 characters. If the symbol just read results in an overflow of the transmission buffer:
• The digital scanner indicates that the symbol was rejected by issuing three long, high beeps.
• No transmission occurs. The data in the buffer is not affected.
Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer
If the symbol just read was the Transmit Buffer symbol and the Code 39 buffer is empty:
• A short lo/hi/lo beep signals that the buffer is empty.
• No transmission occurs.
• The buffer remains empty.
Code 93
Enable/Disable Code 93
Parameter # 09h
To enable or disable Code 93, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable Code 93
(01h)
*Disable Code 93
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-30
Set Lengths for Code 93
Parameter # L1 = 1Ah, L2 = 1Bh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains.
Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
•One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14
characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two selected lengths.
Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those Code 93
symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4.
To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 93 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths
using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 93 symbols containing
between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 93 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers
must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner’s
capability.
Symbologies 13-31
Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued)
Code 11
Code 11
Parameter # 0Ah
To enable or disable Code 11, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Code 93 - One Discrete Length
Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 93 - Length Within Range
Code 93 - Any Length
Enable Code 11
(01h)
*Disable Code 11
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-32
Set Lengths for Code 11
Parameter # L1 = 1Ch, L2 = 1Dh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains.
Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
•One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14
characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two selected lengths.
Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those Code 11
symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4.
To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 11 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths
using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 11 symbols containing
between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 11 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers
must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner
capability.
Code 11 - One Discrete Length
Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 11 - Length Within Range
Code 11 - Any Length
Symbologies 13-33
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 34h
This feature allows the digital scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with the specified
check digit algorithm. This selects the check digit mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code. The options are to check for one
check digit, check for two check digits, or disable the feature.
To enable this feature, scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of check digits encoded in the Code 11 symbols.
*Disable
(00h)
One Check Digit
(01h)
Two Check Digits
(02h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-34
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits
Parameter # 2Fh
This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).
Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
Parameter # 06h
To enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below, and select an Interleaved 2 of 5 length from the following
pages.
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(00h)
*Enable Interleaved 2 of 5
(01h)
Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
(00h)
Note
Symbologies 13-35
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5
Parameter # L1 = 16h, L2 = 17h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains.
Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
•One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols with 14
characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths.
Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those I 2 of 5
symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To
correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Length Within Range - Select this option to decode an I 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths
using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing
between 4 and 12 characters, first scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must
always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Any Length - Scan this option to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner
capability.
Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to be
interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific
lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5 applications.
I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-36
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 31h
When this feature is enabled, the digital scanner checks the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either
the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check digit algorithm.
I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
I 2 of 5 - Any Length
*Disable
(00h)
USS Check Digit
(01h)
OPCC Check Digit
(02h)
Symbologies 13-37
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
Parameter # 2Ch
Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
Parameter # 52h
Enable this parameter to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the host as EAN-13. To accomplish this, the
I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN-13 check digit.
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Disable)
(00h)
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Disable)
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-38
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5
Parameter # 05h
To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5
Parameter # L1 = 14h, L2 = 15h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains.
Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
•One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14
characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths.
Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those D 2 of 5
symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4.
To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a D 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths
using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing
between 4 and 12 characters, first scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers
must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Any Length - Scan this option to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner
capability.
Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent
this, select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of 5
applications.
Enable Discrete 2 of 5
(01h)
*Disable Discrete 2 of 5
(00h)
Note
Symbologies 13-39
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)
Codabar (NW - 7)
Enable/Disable Codabar
Parameter # 07h
To enable or disable Codabar, scan the appropriate bar code below.
D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
D 2 of 5 - Any Length
Enable Codabar
(01h)
*Disable Codabar
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-40
Set Lengths for Codabar
Parameter # L1 = 18h, L2 = 19h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains.
Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
•One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols with 14
characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two selected lengths.
Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct
an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Codabar symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths
using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Codabar symbols containing
between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Codabar - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers
must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Any Length - Scan this option to decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner
capability.
Codabar - One Discrete Length
Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths
Codabar - Length Within Range
Codabar - Any Length
Symbologies 13-41
CLSI Editing
Parameter # 36h
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a
14-character Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format.
Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.
NOTIS Editing
Parameter # 37h
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if the host
system requires this data format.
Enable CLSI Editing
(01h)
*Disable CLSI Editing
(00h)
Enable NOTIS Editing
(01h)
*Disable NOTIS Editing
(00h)
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-42
MSI
Enable/Disable MSI
Parameter # 0Bh
To enable or disable MSI, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Set Lengths for MSI
Parameter # L1 = 1Eh, L2 = 1Fh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains.
Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
•One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using
the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters, scan
MSI - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel
on page D-4.
•Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing either of two selected lengths.
Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, select MSI - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an
error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a MSI symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using
numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and
12 characters, first scan MSI - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be
preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
•Any Length - Scan this option to decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner
capability.
Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent
this, select specific lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for MSI applications.
Enable MSI
(01h)
*Disable MSI
(00h)
Note
Symbologies 13-43
Set Lengths for MSI (continued)
MSI Check Digits
Parameter # 32h
With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is optional. If the MSI
codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification of the second check digit.
See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 13-44 for the selection of second digit algorithms.
MSI - One Discrete Length
MSI - Two Discrete Lengths
MSI - Length Within Range
MSI - Any Length
*One MSI Check Digit
(00h)
Two MSI Check Digits
(01h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-44
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)
Parameter # 2Eh
Scan a bar code below to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
Parameter # 33h
Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit. Select the bar code below corresponding to the
algorithm used to encode the check digit.
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable)
(01h
*Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(00h)
MOD 10/MOD 11
(00h)
*MOD 10/MOD 10
(01h)
Symbologies 13-45
Postal Codes
US Postnet
Parameter # 59h
To enable or disable US Postnet, scan the appropriate bar code below.
US Planet
Parameter # 5Ah
To enable or disable US Planet, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable US Postnet
(01h)
Disable US Postnet
(00h)
*Enable US Planet
(01h)
Disable US Planet
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-46
UK Postal
Parameter # 5Bh
To enable or disable UK Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
Parameter # 60h
Select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit.
*Enable UK Postal
(01h)
Disable UK Postal
(00h)
*Transmit UK Postal
Check Digit
(01h)
Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
(00h)
Symbologies 13-47
Japan Postal
Parameter # F0h, 22h
To enable or disable Japan Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Australian Postal
Parameter # F0h, 23h
To enable or disable Australian Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Japan Postal
(01h)
Disable Japan Postal
(00h)
*Enable Australian Postal
(01h)
Disable Australian Postal
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-48
Dutch Postal
Parameter # F0h, 46h
To enable or disable Dutch Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Transmit US Postal Check Digit
Parameter # 5Fh
Select whether to transmit US Postal data with or without the check digit.
*Enable Dutch Postal
(01h)
Disable Dutch Postal
(00h)
*Transmit US Postal Check Digit
(01h)
Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit
(00h)
Symbologies 13-49
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology)
The variants of RSS are RSS 14, RSS Expanded, and RSS Limited. The limited and expanded versions have stacked variants. Scan the
appropriate bar code below to enable or disable each variant of RSS.
RSS-14
Parameter # F0h 52h.
RSS Limited
Parameter # F0h 53h.
*Enable RSS 14
(01h)
Disable RSS 14
(00h)
*Enable RSS Limited
(01h)
Disable RSS Limited
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-50
RSS Expanded
Parameter # F0h 54h.
Convert RSS to UPC/EAN
Parameter # F0h, 8Dh
This parameter only applies to RSS-14 and RSS Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite symbol. Enable this to strip the
leading '010' from RSS-14 and RSS Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit, and report the bar code as EAN-13.
For bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros, this parameter strips the leading '0100' and reports the bar code as
UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble parameter that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted bar codes. Note
that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped.
*Enable RSS Expanded
(01h)
Disable RSS Expanded
(00h)
Enable Convert RSS to UPC/EAN
(01h)
*Disable Convert RSS to UPC/EAN
(00h)
Symbologies 13-51
Composite
Composite CC-C
Parameter # F0h 55h
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-C.
Composite CC-A/B
Parameter # F0h 56h
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-A/B.
Enable CC-C
(01h)
*Disable CC-C
(00h)
Enable CC-A/B
(01h)
*Disable CC-A/B
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-52
Composite TLC-39
Parameter # F0h 73h
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type TLC-39.
Enable TLC39
(01h)
*Disable TLC39
(00h)
Symbologies 13-53
UPC Composite Mode
Parameter # F0h 58h
UPC symbols can be “linked” with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol. There are three options for these
symbols:
• Select UPC Never Linked to transmit UPC bar codes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected.
• Select UPC Always Linked to transmit UPC bar codes and the 2D portion.
If 2D is not present, the UPC bar code does not transmit.
• If Autodiscriminate UPC Composites is selected, the scanner determines if there is a 2D portion, then transmits the UPC, as
well as the 2D portion if present.
UPC Never Linked
(00h)
*UPC Always Linked
(01h)
Autodiscriminate UPC Composites
(02h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-54
Composite Beep Mode
Parameter # F0h, 8Eh
To select the number of decode beeps when a composite bar code is decoded, scan the appropriate bar code.
UCC/EAN Code 128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes
Parameter # F0h, ABh
Select whether to enable or disable this mode.
Single Beep after both are decoded
(00h)
*Beep as each code type is decoded
(01h)
Double Beep after both are decoded
(02h)
Enable UCC/EAN Code 128 Emulation Mode for
UCC/EAN Composite Codes
(01h)
*Disable UCC/EAN Code 128 Emulation Mode for
UCC/EAN Composite Codes
(00h)
Symbologies 13-55
2D Symbologies
Enable/Disable PDF417
Parameter # 0Fh
To enable or disable PDF417, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable MicroPDF417
Parameter # E3h
To enable or disable MicroPDF417, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable PDF417
(01h)
Disable PDF417
(00h)
Enable MicroPDF417
(01h)
*Disable MicroPDF417
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-56
Code 128 Emulation
Parameter # 7Bh
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128
symbols. Transmit AIM Symbology Identifiers must be enabled for this parameter to work.
If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, these MicroPDF417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911
If disabled, they are transmitted with one of the following prefixes:
]L3 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation.
Enable Code 128 Emulation
(01h)
*Disable Code 128 Emulation
(00h)
Symbologies 13-57
Data Matrix
Parameter # F0h, 24h
To enable or disable Data Matrix, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Maxicode
Parameter # F0h, 26h
To enable or disable Maxicode, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Data Matrix
(01h)
Disable Data Matrix
(00h)
*Enable Maxicode
(01h)
Disable Maxicode
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-58
QR Code
Parameter # F0h,25h
To enable or disable QR Code, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable QR Code
(01h)
Disable QR Code
(00h)
Symbologies 13-59
Redundancy Level
Parameter # 4Eh
The digital scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of bar code quality.
As redundancy levels increase, the digital scanner’s aggressiveness decreases.
Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality.
Redundancy Level 1
The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Redundancy Level 2
The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Redundancy Level 3
Code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three
times:
Redundancy Level 4
The following code types must be successfully read three times before being decoded:
Code Type Code Length
Codabar 8 characters or less
MSI 4 characters or less
D 2 of 5 8 characters or less
I 2 of 5 8 characters or less
Code Type Code Length
All All
Code Type Code Length
MSI Plessey 4 characters or less
D 2 of 5 8 characters or less
I 2 of 5 8 characters or less
Codabar 8 characters or less
Code Type Code Length
All All
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-60
Redundancy Level (continued)
*Redundancy Level 1
(01h)
Redundancy Level 2
(02h)
Redundancy Level 3
(03h)
Redundancy Level 4
(04h)
Symbologies 13-61
Security Level
Parameter # 4Dh
The digital scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes, which include the Code 128 family, UPC/EAN, and Code
93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality. There is an inverse relationship between security and
digital scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security necessary for any given application.
•Security Level 0: This default setting allows the digital scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while providing
sufficient security in decoding most “in-spec” bar codes.
•Security Level 1: Select this option if misdecodes occur. This security level should eliminate most misdecodes.
•Security Level 2: Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Security Level 3: If Security Level 2 was selected and misdecodes still occur, select this security level. Be advised, selecting
this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out of spec bar codes. Selecting this level of security
significantly impairs the decoding ability of the digital scanner. If this level of security is necessary, try to improve the quality
of the bar codes.
*Security Level 0
(00h)
Security Level 1
(01h)
Security Level 2
(02h)
Security Level 3
(03h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-62
Intercharacter Gap Size
Parameter # F0h, 7Dh
The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is typically quite small. Due to various bar code-printing
technologies, this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed, preventing the digital scanner from decoding the symbol. If
this problem occurs, scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these out-of-specification bar codes.
Report Version
Scan the bar code below to report the version of software currently installed in the digital scanner.
*Normal Intercharacter Gaps
(06h)
Large Intercharacter Gaps
(0Ah)
Report Software Version
Symbologies 13-63
Macro PDF Features
Macro PDF is a special feature for concatenating multiple PDF symbols into one file. The digital scanner can decode symbols that are
encoded with this feature, and can store more than 64 kb of decoded data stored in up to 50 MacroPDF symbols.
When printing, keep each Macro PDF sequence separate, as each sequence has unique identifiers. Do not
mix bar codes from several Macro PDF sequences, even if they encode the same data. When scanning Macro
PDF sequences, scan the entire Macro PDF sequence without interruption. If, when scanning a mixed
sequence, the digital scanner emits two long low beeps (Lo Lo) this indicates an inconsistent file ID or
inconsistent symbology error.
Flush Macro Buffer
This flushes the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point, transmits it to the host device, and aborts from Macro PDF
mode.
Abort Macro PDF Entry
This clears all currently-stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and aborts from Macro PDF mode.
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
Abort Macro PDF Entry
CAUTION
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide13-64
Miscellaneous Scanner Options
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Transmit Code ID Character. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Prefix/Suffix Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Scan Data Transmission Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7
FN1 Substitution Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8
Transmit “No Read” Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-9
Synapse Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-10
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide14-2
Miscellaneous Scanner Options 14-3
Introduction
This chapter includes commonly used bar codes to customize how data is transmitted to the host device. See Chapter 15, Advanced
Data Formatting for further customization options.
The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in the Miscellaneous Scanner Options Default Table on page 14-4 (also see
Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous scanner defaults). If the default values suit
requirements, programming is not necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are
preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down.
Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure
to set the document magnification to a level where the bar code can be seen clearly, and bars and/or spaces are not
merging.
If not using a Synapse or USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps
sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, scan the *Set All Defaults bar code on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar code menus,
default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scan one bar code to set a specific parameter value. Other parameters, such as Prefix Value, require scanning several
bar codes. See each parameter for descriptions of this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Note
*Disable No Read
(00h) Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
Hex Value
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide14-4
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameter Defaults
Table 14-1 lists the defaults for miscellaneous scanner options parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)
provided in the Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters on page 14-5.
See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 14-1. Miscellaneous Scanner Options Default Table
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
Transmit Code ID Character 2Dh None 14-5
Prefix Value 63h, 69h 7013 <CR><LF> 14-6
Suffix 1 Value
Suffix 2 Value
62h, 68h
64h, 6Ah
7013 <CR><LF> 14-6
Scan Data Transmission Format EBh Data as is 14-7
FN1 Substitution Values 67h, 6Dh Set 14-8
Transmit “No Read” Message 5Eh Disable 14-9
Synapse Interface F0h ACh Standard 14-10
Note
Miscellaneous Scanner Options 14-5
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters
Transmit Code ID Character
Parameter # 2Dh
A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code. This is useful when the digital scanner is decoding more than one
code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the
decoded symbol.
Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID Characters, see Symbol Code
Identifiers on page B-3 and AIM Code Identifiers on page B-4.
Symbol Code ID Character
(02h)
AIM Code ID Character
(01h)
*None
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide14-6
Prefix/Suffix Values
Key Category Parameter # P = 63h, S1 = 62h, S2 = 64h
Decimal Value Parameter # P = 69h, S1 = 68h, S2 = 6Ah
A prefix and/or one or two suffixes can be appended to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a prefix or suffix, scan a
four-digit number (i.e., four bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes) that corresponds to that value. See Table E-1 on page E-
3 for the four-digit codes.
When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix , set the key category parameter to 1, then set the 3-digit decimal value. See
Table E-1 on page E-3 for the four-digit codes.
To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
To use Prefix/Suffix values, first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 14-7.
Scan Prefix
(07h)
Scan Suffix 1
(06h)
Scan Suffix 2
(08h)
Data Format Cancel
Note
Miscellaneous Scanner Options 14-7
Scan Data Transmission Format
Parameter # EBh
To change the scan data format, scan one of the following eight bar codes corresponding to the desired format.
If using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix/suffix.
To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 14-6.
*Data As Is
(00h)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1>
(01h)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 2>
(02h)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>
(03h)
<PREFIX> <DATA >
(04h)
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide14-8
FN1 Substitution Values
Key Category Parameter # 67h
Decimal Value Parameter # 6Dh
The Wedge and USB HID Keyboard hosts support a FN1 Substitution feature. When enabled any FN1 character (0x1b) in an EAN128
bar code is substituted with a value. This value defaults to 7013 (Enter Key).
When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value, set the key category parameter to 1, then set the 3-digit keystroke
value. See the ASCII Character Set table for the currently installed host interface for the desired value.
To select a FN1 substitution value via bar code menus:
1. Scan the bar code below.
2. Look up the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the currently installed host interface.
Enter the 4-digit ASCII Value by scanning each digit in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel.
To enable FN1 substitution for keyboard wedge, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page 6-12.
To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page 8-10.
Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1>
(05h)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 2>
(06h)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>
(07h)
Set FN1 Substitution Value
Miscellaneous Scanner Options 14-9
Transmit “No Read” Message
Parameter # 5Eh
Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to transmit a No Read message. When enabled, the characters NR are transmitted
when a bar code is not decoded. When disabled, if a symbol does not decode, nothing is sent to the host.
Enable No Read
(01h)
*Disable No Read
(00h)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide14-10
Synapse Interface
Parameter # F0h, ACh
The auto-detection of a Synapse cable varies in duration depending on the type of Synapse connection. If a digital scanner is
connected to another scanner using a Synapse cable, use the Auxiliary Synapse Port connection. In all other cases, where the cable
is used, the default setting is recommended.
To disconnect and reconnect the digital scanner from a Synapse cable that is connected to a live host via a Synapse, use the "Plug
and Play" setting. Do not change this setting from the default if an on-board wedge host is enabled.
*Standard Synapse Connection
(01h)
Auxiliary Synapse Port Connection
(32h)
“Plug and Play” Synapse Connection
(0Ah)
Advanced Data Formatting
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3
Using ADF Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-4
ADF Bar Code Menu Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-4
Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Alternate Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
Default Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-7
Special Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Pause Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Begin New Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Save Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-9
Quit Entering Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-9
Disable Rule Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-10
Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11
Code Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11
Code Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-17
Message Containing A Specific Data String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-22
Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-27
Send Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-27
Setup Field(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-30
Modify Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-36
Pad Data with Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-37
Pad Data with Zeros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-41
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-2
Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-46
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-46
Send Right Control Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-82
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-83
Turn On/Off Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-88
Alphanumeric Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-90
Advanced Data Formatting 15-3
Introduction
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) is a means of customizing data before transmission to the host device. Scan data can be edited to
suit particular requirements.
ADF can be implemented through scanning a related series of bar codes, which begin on page 15-8, or by installing the 123Scan utility
(see Chapter 12, 123 Scan) which allows the digital scanner to be setup and programmed with Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) Rules.
Avoid using ADF formatting with bar codes containing more than 60 characters. To add a prefix or suffix value for such bar codes, use
Add Prefix/Suffix setting. Using ADF with longer bar codes transmits the bar code in segments of length 252 or less (depending on
the host selected), and applies the rule to each segment
If using the Wand interface with the digital scanner, in order to use ADF rules to format data, first enable
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 on page 10-8.
Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions
In ADF, data is customized through rules. These rules perform detailed actions when the data meets certain criteria. One rule may
consist of single or multiple criteria applied to single or multiple actions.
For instance, a data formatting rule could be the following:
Criteria: When scan data is Code 39, length 12, and data at the start position is
the string “129”,
Actions: pad all sends with zeros to length 8,
send all data up to X,
send a space.
If a Code 39 bar code of 1299X1559828 is scanned, the following is transmitted: 00001299<space>. If a Code 39 bar code of
1299X15598 is scanned, this rule is ignored because the length criteria has not been met.
The rule specifies the editing conditions and requirements before data transmission occurs.
Note
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-4
Using ADF Bar Codes
When programming a rule, make sure the rule is logically correct. Plan ahead before scanning.
To program each data formatting rule:
•Start the Rule. Scan the Begin New Rule bar code on page 15-8.
•Criteria. Scan the bar codes for all pertinent criteria. Criteria can include code type (e.g., Code 128), code length, or data
that contains a specific character string (e.g., the digits “129”). These options are described in Criteria on page 15-11.
•Actions. Scan all actions related to, or affecting, these criteria. The actions of a rule specify how to format the data for
transmission. These options are described in ADF Bar Code Menu Example on page 15-4.
•Save the Rule. Scan the Save Rule bar code on page 15-8. This places the rule in the “top” position in the rule buffer.
• Some special-purpose bar codes can be useful to correct errors during this process:
Erase Criteria and Start Again, Erase Actions and Start Again, Erase Previously Saved Rule, etc.
Criteria, actions, and entire rules may be erased by scanning the appropriate bar code (see page 15-9).
Beeper Definitions on page 2-4 guide through the programming steps.
ADF Bar Code Menu Example
This section provides an example of how ADF rules are entered and used for scan data.
An auto parts distribution center wants to encode manufacturer ID, part number, and destination code into their own Code 128 bar
codes. The distribution center also has products that carry UPC bar codes, placed there by the manufacturer. The Code 128 bar codes
have the following format:
MMMMMPPPPPDD
Where: M = Manufacturer ID
P = Part Number
D = Destination Code
The distribution center uses a PC with dedicated control characters for manufacturer ID <CTRL M>, part number <CTRL P>, and
destination code <CTRL D>. At this center the UPC data is treated as manufacturer ID code.
The following rules need to be entered:
When scanning data of code type Code 128, send the next 5 characters, send the manufacturer ID key <CTRL M>, send the next
5 characters, send the part number key <CTRL P>, send the next 2 characters, send the destination code key <CTRL D>.
When scanning data of code type UPC/EAN, send all data, send the manufacturer ID key <CTRL M>.
To enter these rules, follow the steps below:
Advanced Data Formatting 15-5
Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule
Step Bar Code On Page Beep Indication
1 Begin New Rule 15-8 High High
2 Code 128 15-11 High High
3 Send next 5 characters 15-28 High High
4 Send <CTRL M> 15-48 High High
5 Send next 5 characters 15-28 High High
6 Send <CTRL P> 15-48 High High
7 Send next 2 characters 15-27 High High
8 Send <CTRL D> 15-47 High High
9Save Rule 15-8 High Low High Low
Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule
Step Bar Code On Page Beep Indication
1 Begin New Rule 15-8 High High
2UPC/EAN 15-12 High High
3 Send all remaining data 15-27 High High
4 Send <CTRL M> 15-48 High High
5Save Rule 15-8 High Low High Low
To correct any errors made while entering this rule, scan the Quit Entering Rules bar code on page 15-9. If the rule is already saved,
scan the Erase Previously Saved Rule bar code on page 15-9.
Alternate Rule Sets
ADF rules may be grouped into one of four alternate sets which can be turned on and off when needed. This is useful to format the
same message in different ways. For example, a Code 128 bar code contains the following information:
Class (2 digits), Stock Number (8) digits, Price (5 digits)
This bar code might look like this:
245671243701500
where:
Class = 24
Stock Number = 56712437
Price = 01500
Ordinarily, data is sent as follows:
24 (class key)
56712437 (stock key)
01500 (enter key)
But, when there is a sale, send only the following:
24 (class key)
56712437 (stock key)
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-6
and the cashier will key the price manually.
To implement this, first enter an ADF rule that applies to the normal situation, such as:
Scan Rule Belongs to Set 1. When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next
8 characters, send the stock key, send the data that remains, send the Enter key.
The “sale” rule may look like this:
Scan Rule Belongs to Set 2. When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next
8 characters, send the stock key.
To switch between the two sets of rules, a “switching rule” must be programmed. This rule specifies what type of bar code must be
scanned to switch between the rule sets. For example, in the case of the “sale” rule above, the rule programmer wants the cashier
to scan the bar code “M” before a sale. To do this, a rule can be entered as follows:
When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with “M”, select rule set number 1.
Another rule could be programmed to switch back.
When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with “N”, turn off rule set number 1.
The switching back to normal rules can also be done in the “sale” rule. For example, the rule may look like this:
When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock
key, turn off rule set 1.
For optimal results, scan the Disable All Rule Sets bar code on page 15-10 after programming a rule belonging to an alternate rule
set.
In addition to enabling and disabling rule sets within the rules, enable or disable them by scanning the appropriate bar codes on 15-10.
Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes)
The order of programming individual rules is important.The most general rule should be programmed last.
All programmed rules are stored in a buffer. As they are programmed, they are stored at the “top” of a rules list. If three rules have
been created, the list would be configured as follows:
Third Rule
Second Rule
First Rule
When data is scanned, the rules list is checked from top to bottom to determine if the criteria matches (and therefore, if the actions
should occur). Input is modified into the data format specified by the first matching set of criteria it finds. Be sure to program the most
general rule last.
For example, if the THIRD rule states:
When scanning a bar code of any length, send all data, then send the ENTER key.
And the SECOND rule states:
When scanning a Code 128 bar code of length 12, send the first four characters, then send the ENTER key, then send all remaining
data.
If a Code 128 bar code of length 12 were scanned, the THIRD rule would be in effect. The SECOND rule would appear to not function.
Note also that ADF rules are actually created when using the standard data editing functions. Scan options are entered as ADF rules,
and the hierarchy mentioned above also applies to them. For the digital scanner, this applies to prefix/suffix programming in the
parameter Scan Data Transmission Format.
Advanced Data Formatting 15-7
These rules reside in the same “rule list” as ADF Rules, so the order of their creation is also important.
Default Rules
Every unit has a default rule to send all scan data. Units with custom software may have one or more default rules burned in. The
rules hierarchy checks user programmable rules first, then the default rules. Default rules can be disabled by entering the following
general rule in the user programmable buffer:
When receiving scan data, send all data.
Since this rule always applies, ADF will never go into the default rules.
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-8
Special Commands
Pause Duration
This parameter along with the Send Pause parameter on page 15-31 allows a pause to be inserted in the data transmission. Pauses
are set by scanning a two-digit number (i.e., two bar codes), and are measured in 0.1 second intervals. For example, scanning bar
codes “0” and “1” inserts a 0.1 second pause; “0” and “5” inserts a 0.5 second delay. See Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. To correct
an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.
Pause Duration
Begin New Rule
Scan this bar code to start entering a new rule
.
Begin New Rule
Save Rule
Scan this bar code to save the rule.
Save Rule
Advanced Data Formatting 15-9
Erase
Use these bar codes to erase criteria, actions, or rules.
Quit Entering Rules
Scan this bar code to quit entering rules.
Quit Entering Rules
Erase Criteria And Start Again
Erase Actions And Start Again
Erase Previously Saved Rule
Erase All Rules
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-10
Disable Rule Set
Use these bar codes to disable rule sets.
Disable Rule Set 1
Disable Rule Set 2
Disable Rule Set 3
Disable Rule Set 4
Disable All Rule Sets
Advanced Data Formatting 15-11
Criteria
Code Types
Select any number of code types to be affected. All selected codes must be scanned in succession, prior to selecting other criteria.
To select all code types, do not scan any code type.
Scan the bar codes for all code types desired before selecting other criteria.
Code 39
Codabar
RSS 14
RSS Limited
RSS Expanded
Code 128
D 2 OF 5
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-12
Code Types (continued)
IATA 2 OF 5
I 2 OF 5
Code 93
UPC-A
UPC-E
EAN-8
EAN-13
Advanced Data Formatting 15-13
Code Types (continued)
MSI
UCC/EAN 128
UPC-E1
Bookland EAN
Trioptic Code 39
Code 11
Code 32
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-14
Code Types (continued)
ISBT 128
EAN 128
Coupon Code
US Postnet
US Planet
UK Postal
Japan Postal
Advanced Data Formatting 15-15
Code Types (continued)
Australian Postal
Dutch Postal
PDF417
MicroPDF
Macro PDF
Macro MicroPDF
MaxiCode
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-16
When selecting composite bar codes, enable AIM IDs if parsing UPC or EAN composite data, or data from an
application that uses symbol separators.
Code Types (continued)
Datamatrix
QR Code
TLC 39
UPC/EAN Composites
RSS and EAN128 Composites
Advanced Data Formatting 15-17
Code Lengths
Define the number of characters the selected code type must contain. Do not select any code length to select code types of any length.
Scan these bar codes to define the number of characters the selected code types must contain. Select one length per rule only.
1 Character
2 Characters
3 Characters
4 Characters
5 Characters
6 Characters
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-18
Code Lengths (continued)
7 Characters
8 Characters
9 Characters
10 Characters
11 Characters
12 Characters
13 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 15-19
Code Lengths (continued)
14 Characters
15 Characters
16 Characters
17 Characters
18 Characters
19 Characters
20 Characters
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-20
Code Lengths (continued)
21 Characters
22 Characters
23 Characters
24 Characters
25 Characters
26 Characters
27 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 15-21
Code Lengths (continued)
28 Characters
29 Characters
30 Characters
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-22
Message Containing A Specific Data String
Use this feature to select whether the formatting affects data that begins with a specific character or data string, or contains a
specific character or data string.
There are 4 features:
• Specific String at Start
• Specific String, Any Location
• Any Message OK
• Rule Belongs to Set
Specific String at Start
Scan this bar code, then scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters (up to a total of 8) in the Alphanumeric
Keyboard on page 15-90.
After scanning the following bar code:
1. Enter a string using the Alphanumeric Keyboard beginning on page 15-90.
2. Scan End of Message on page 15-99.
Specific String At Start
Advanced Data Formatting 15-23
Specific String, Any Location
Scan this bar code, then, using the Numeric Keypad on page 15-24, scan a two-digit number representing the position (use a leading
“zero” if necessary). Then scan the desired character or characters (up to a total of 8) on the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15-90,
followed by the End of Message bar code on page 15-99.
After scanning the following bar code:
1. Enter a location using the “Numeric Keypad” on page 24.
2. Enter a string using the Alphanumeric Keyboard beginning on page 15-90.
3. Scan End of Message on page 15-99.
Specific String Any Location
Any Message OK
By not scanning any bar code, all selected code types are formatted, regardless of information contained.
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-24
Numeric Keypad
Bar codes on this page should not be confused with those on the alphanumeric keyboard.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Advanced Data Formatting 15-25
Numeric Keypad (continued)
7
8
9
Cancel
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-26
Rule Belongs To Set
Select the set a rule belongs to. (There are four possible rule sets.) See Alternate Rule Sets on page 15-5 for more information about
rule sets.
Scan a bar code below to select which set a rule belongs to.
Rule Belongs To Set 1
Rule Belongs To Set 2
Rule Belongs To Set 3
Rule Belongs To Set 4
Advanced Data Formatting 15-27
Actions
Select how to format the data for transmission.
Send Data
Send all data that remains, send all data up to a specific character selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15-90, or send
the next N characters. N = any number from 1 to 254, selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard. Use these bar codes to send data.
Send Data Up To Character
Send All Data That Remains
Send Next Character
Send Next 2 Characters
Send Next 3 Characters
Send Next 4 Characters
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-28
Send Data (continued)
Send Next 5 Characters
Send Next 6 Characters
Send Next 7 Characters
Send Next 8 Characters
Send Next 9 Characters
Send Next 10 Characters
Send Next 11 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 15-29
Send Data (continued)
Send Next 12 Characters
Send Next 13 Characters
Send Next 14 Characters
Send Next 15 Characters
Send Next 16 Characters
Send Next 17 Characters
Send Next 18 Characters
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-30
Setup Field(s)
Send Data (continued)
Send Next 19 Characters
Send Next 20 Characters
Table 15-1. Setup Field(s) Definitions
Parameter Description Page
Move Cursor
Move Cursor To a Character
Scan the Move Cursor To Character bar code on page 15-31,
then any printable ASCII character from the Alphanumeric
Keyboard. When this is used, the cursor moves to the position
after the matching character. If the character is not there, the rule
fails and ADF tries the next rule.
15-31
Move Cursor to Start of Data Scan this bar code to move cursor to the beginning of the data. 15-31
Move Cursor Past a Character
This parameter moves the cursor past all sequential occurrences
of a selected character. For example, if the selected character is
‘A’, then the cursor moves past ‘A’, ‘AA’, ‘AAA’, etc. Scan the
Move Cursor Past Character bar code on page 15-31, then
select a character from the Alphanumeric Keyboard. If the
character is not there, the cursor does not move (i.e., has no
effect).
15-31
Skip Ahead “N” Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions
ahead to move the cursor.
15-32
Skip Back “N” Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions
back to move the cursor.
15-33
Send Preset Value
Send Values 1 through 6 by scanning the appropriate bar code.
These values must be set using the prefix/suffix values in Table
7-4 on page 7-21.
Value 1 = Scan Suffix
Value 2 = Scan Prefix
Values 3-6 are not applicable
15-35
Advanced Data Formatting 15-31
Move Cursor
Scan a bar code below to move the cursor in relation to a specified character. Then enter a character by scanning a bar code from the
Alphanumeric Keyboard beginning on page 15-90.
If there is no match when the rule is interpreted and the rule fails, the next rule is checked.
Send Pause
Scan the bar code below to insert a pause in the transmission of data. The length of this pause is controlled by the value of the Pause
Duration parameter.
Move Cursor To Character
Move Cursor To Start
Move Cursor Past Character
Send Pause
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-32
Skip Ahead
Use the following bar codes to skip ahead characters.
Skip Ahead 1 Character
Skip Ahead 2 Characters
Skip Ahead 3 Characters
Skip Ahead 4 Characters
Skip Ahead 5 Characters
Skip Ahead 7 Characters
Skip Ahead 8 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 15-33
Skip Back
Use the following bar codes to skip back characters.
Skip Ahead (continued)
Skip Ahead 9 Characters
Skip Ahead 10 Characters
Skip Ahead 6 Characters
Skip Back 1 Character
Skip Back 2 Characters
Skip Back 3 Characters
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-34
Skip Back (continued)
Skip Back 4 Characters
Skip Back 5 Characters
Skip Back 6 Characters
Skip Back 7 Characters
Skip Back 8 Characters
Skip Back 9 Characters
Skip Back 10 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 15-35
Send Preset Value
Use these bar codes to send preset values. These values must be set using the Scan Prefix and Scan Suffix bar codes on page 14-6.
Send Prefix
Send Suffix
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-36
Modify Data
Modify data in the ways listed. The following actions work for all send commands that follow it within a rule. Programming pad zeros
to length 6, send next 3 characters, stop padding, send next 5 characters, adds three zeros to the first send, and the next send is
unaffected by the padding. These options do not apply to the Send Keystroke or Send Preset Value options.
Remove All Spaces
To remove all spaces in the send commands that follow, scan this bar code.
Remove All Spaces
Crunch All Spaces
To leave one space between words, scan this bar code. This also removes all leading and trailing spaces.
Crunch All Spaces
Stop Space Removal
Scan this bar code to disable space removal.
Stop Space Removal
Remove Leading Zeros
Scan this bar code to remove all leading zeros.
Remove Leading Zeros
Stop Zero Removal
Scan this bar code to disable the removal of zeros.
Stop Zero Removal
Advanced Data Formatting 15-37
Pad Data with Spaces
To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of spaces. This parameter is activated by Send commands.
Pad Spaces To Length 1
Pad Spaces To Length 2
Pad Spaces To Length 3
Pad Spaces To Length 4
Pad Spaces To Length 5
Pad Spaces To Length 6
Pad Spaces To Length 7
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-38
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)
Pad Spaces To Length 8
Pad Spaces To Length 9
Pad Spaces To Length 10
Pad Spaces To Length 11
Pad Spaces To Length 12
Pad Spaces To Length 13
Pad Spaces To Length 14
Advanced Data Formatting 15-39
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)
Pad Spaces To Length 15
Pad Spaces To Length 16
Pad Spaces To Length 17
Pad Spaces To Length 18
Pad Spaces To Length 19
Pad Spaces To Length 20
Pad Spaces To Length 21
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-40
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)
Pad Spaces To Length 22
Pad Spaces To Length 23
Pad Spaces To Length 24
Pad Spaces To Length 25
Pad Spaces To Length 26
Pad Spaces To Length 27
Pad Spaces To Length 28
Advanced Data Formatting 15-41
Pad Data with Zeros
To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of zeros. This parameter is activated by Send commands.
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)
Pad Spaces To Length 29
Pad Spaces To Length 30
Stop Pad Spaces
Pad Zeros To Length 1
Pad Zeros To Length 2
Pad Zeros To Length 3
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-42
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)
Pad Zeros To Length 4
Pad Zeros To Length 5
Pad Zeros To Length 6
Pad Zeros To Length 7
Pad Zeros To Length 8
Pad Zeros To Length 9
Pad Zeros To Length 10
Advanced Data Formatting 15-43
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)
Pad Zeros To Length 11
Pad Zeros To Length 12
Pad Zeros To Length 13
Pad Zeros To Length 14
Pad Zeros To Length 15
Pad Zeros To Length 16
Pad Zeros To Length 17
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-44
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)
Pad Zeros To Length 18
Pad Zeros To Length 19
Pad Zeros To Length 20
Pad Zeros To Length 21
Pad Zeros To Length 22
Pad Zeros To Length 23
Pad Zeros To Length 24
Advanced Data Formatting 15-45
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)
Pad Zeros To Length 25
Pad Zeros To Length 26
Pad Zeros To Length 27
Pad Zeros To Length 28
Pad Zeros To Length 29
Pad Zeros To Length 30
Stop Pad Zeros
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-46
Beeps
Select a beep sequence for each ADF rule.
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters)
Control Characters
Scan the “Send __” bar code for the keystroke to send
Beep Once
Beep Twice
Beep Three Times
Send Control 2
Send Control A
Send Control B
Advanced Data Formatting 15-47
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control C
Send Control D
Send Control E
Send Control F
Send Control G
Send Control H
Send Control I
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-48
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control J
Send Control K
Send Control L
Send Control M
Send Control N
Send Control O
Send Control P
Advanced Data Formatting 15-49
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control Q
Send Control R
Send Control S
Send Control T
Send Control U
Send Control V
Send Control W
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-50
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control X
Send Control Y
Send Control Z
Send Control [
Send Control \
Send Control ]
Advanced Data Formatting 15-51
Keyboard Characters
Scan the “Send __” bar code for the keyboard characters to send.
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control 6
Send Control -
Send Space
Send !
Send “
Send #
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-52
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send $
Send %
Send &
Send ‘
Send (
Send )
Send *
Advanced Data Formatting 15-53
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send +
Send ,
Send -
Send .
Send /
Send 0
Send 1
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-54
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 2
Send 3
Send 4
Send 5
Send 6
Send 7
Send 8
Advanced Data Formatting 15-55
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 9
Send :
Send ;
Send <
Send =
Send >
Send ?
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-56
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send @
Send A
Send B
Send C
Send D
Send E
Send F
Advanced Data Formatting 15-57
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send G
Send H
Send I
Send J
Send K
Send L
Send M
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-58
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send N
Send O
Send P
Send Q
Send R
Send S
Send T
Advanced Data Formatting 15-59
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send U
Send V
Send W
Send X
Send Y
Send Z
Send [
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-60
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send \
Send ]
Send ^
Send _
Send `
Send a
Send b
Advanced Data Formatting 15-61
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send c
Send d
Send e
Send f
Send g
Send h
Send i
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-62
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send j
Send k
Send l
Send m
Send n
Send o
Send p
Advanced Data Formatting 15-63
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send q
Send r
Send s
Send t
Send u
Send v
Send w
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-64
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send x
Send y
Send z
Send {
Send |
Send }
Send ~
Advanced Data Formatting 15-65
Send ALT Characters
Send Alt 2
Send Alt A
Send Alt B
Send Alt C
Send Alt D
Send Alt E
Send Alt F
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-66
Send ALT Characters (continued)
Send Alt G
Send Alt H
Send Alt I
Send Alt J
Send Alt K
Send Alt L
Send Alt M
Advanced Data Formatting 15-67
Send ALT Characters (continued)
Send Alt N
Send Alt O
Send Alt P
Send Alt Q
Send Alt R
Send Alt S
Send Alt T
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-68
Send ALT Characters (continued)
Send Alt U
Send Alt V
Send Alt W
Send Alt X
Send Alt Y
Send Alt Z
Send Alt [
Advanced Data Formatting 15-69
Send ALT Characters (continued)
Send Alt \
Send Alt ]
Send Alt 6
Send Alt -
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-70
Send Keypad Characters
Send Keypad *
Send Keypad +
Send Keypad -
Send Keypad .
Send Keypad /
Send Keypad 0
Send Keypad 1
Advanced Data Formatting 15-71
Send Keypad Characters (continued)
Send Keypad 2
Send Keypad 3
Send Keypad 4
Send Keypad 5
Send Keypad 6
Send Keypad 7
Send Keypad 8
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-72
Send Keypad Characters (continued)
Send Keypad 9
Send Keypad Enter
Send Keypad Numlock
Send Break Key
Send Delete Key
Send Page Up Key
Send End Key
Advanced Data Formatting 15-73
Send Keypad Characters (continued)
Send Page Down Key
Send Pause Key
Send Scroll Lock Key
Send Backspace Key
Send Tab Key
Send Print Screen Key
Send Insert Key
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-74
Send Keypad Characters (continued)
Send Home Key
Send Enter Key
Send Escape Key
Send Up Arrow Key
Send Down Arrow Key
Send Left Arrow Key
Send Right Arrow Key
Advanced Data Formatting 15-75
Send Function Key
Send F1 Key
Send F2 Key
Send F3 Key
Send F4 Key
Send F5 Key
Send F6 Key
Send F7 Key
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-76
Send Function Key (continued)
Send F8 Key
Send F9 Key
Send F10 Key
Send F11 Key
Send F12 Key
Send F13 Key
Send F14 Key
Advanced Data Formatting 15-77
Send Function Key (continued)
Send F15 Key
Send F16 Key
Send F17 Key
Send F18 Key
Send F19 Key
Send F20 Key
Send F21 Key
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-78
Send Function Key (continued)
Send F22 Key
Send F23 Key
Send F24 Key
Send PF1 Key
Send PF2 Key
Send PF3 Key
Send PF4 Key
Advanced Data Formatting 15-79
Send Function Key (continued)
Send PF5 Key
Send PF6 Key
Send PF7 Key
Send PF8 Key
Send PF9 Key
Send PF10 Key
Send PF11 Key
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-80
Send Function Key (continued)
Send PF12 Key
Send PF13 Key
Send PF14 Key
Send PF15 Key
Send PF16 Key
Send PF17 Key
Send PF18 Key
Advanced Data Formatting 15-81
Send Function Key (continued)
Send PF19 Key
Send PF20 Key
Send PF21 Key
Send PF22 Key
Send PF23 Key
Send PF24 Key
Send PF25 Key
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-82
Send Right Control Key
The “Send Right Control Key” action will send a tap (press and release) of the Right Control Key.
Send Right Control Key
Send Function Key (continued)
Send PF26 Key
Send PF27 Key
Send PF28 Key
Send PF29 Key
Send PF30 Key
Advanced Data Formatting 15-83
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters
The “Send Graphic User Interface Character” actions will tap the specified key while holding the System Dependent Graphic User
Interface (GUI) Key. The definition of the Graphic User Interface key is dependant upon the attached system:
Send GUI 0
Send GUI 1
Send GUI 2
Send GUI 3
Send GUI 4
Send GUI 5
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-84
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (conitinued)
Send GUI 6
Send GUI 7
Send GUI 8
Send GUI 9
Send GUI A
Send GUI B
Send GUI C
Advanced Data Formatting 15-85
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (conitinued)
Send GUI D
Send GUI E
Send GUI F
Send GUI G
Send GUI H
Send GUI I
Send GUI J
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-86
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (conitinued)
Send GUI K
Send GUI L
Send GUI M
Send GUI N
Send GUI O
Send GUI P
Send GUI Q
Advanced Data Formatting 15-87
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (conitinued)
Send GUI R
Send GUI S
Send GUI T
Send GUI U
Send GUI V
Send GUI W
Send GUI X
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-88
Turn On/Off Rule Sets
Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off.
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (conitinued)
Send GUI Y
Send GUI Z
Turn On Rule Set 1
Turn On Rule Set 2
Turn On Rule Set 3
Turn On Rule Set 4
Advanced Data Formatting 15-89
Turn On/Off Rule Sets (continued)
Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off.
Turn Off Rule Set 1
Turn Off Rule Set 2
Turn Off Rule Set 3
Turn Off Rule Set 4
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-90
Alphanumeric Keyboard
Space
#
$
%
*
+
-
(Dash)
Advanced Data Formatting 15-91
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
.
/
!
“
&
‘
(
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-92
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
)
:
;
<
=
>
?
Advanced Data Formatting 15-93
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
@
[
\
]
^
_
(Underscore)
`
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-94
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
Numeric bar codes below should not be confused with those on the numeric keypad.
0
1
2
3
4
5
Advanced Data Formatting 15-95
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-96
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Advanced Data Formatting 15-97
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-98
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Advanced Data Formatting 15-99
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
Y
Z
Cancel
End of Message
a
b
c
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-100
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Advanced Data Formatting 15-101
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-102
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
Advanced Data Formatting 15-103
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
y
z
{
|
}
~
DS 3408 Product Reference Guide15-104
Standard Default Parameters
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideA-2
Standard Default Parameters A-3
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter All Defaults 4-5
Parameter Scanning ECh Enable 4-5
Beeper Tone 91h Medium 4-6
Beeper Volume 8Ch High 4-7
Power Mode 80h Continuous On 4-7
Time Delay to Low Power Mode 92h 5 Minutes 4-8
Trigger Mode 8Ah Level 4-9
Decode Session Timeout 88h 9.9 Sec 4-10
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol 89h 0.6 Sec 4-10
Beep After Good Decode 38h Enable 4-11
Scanstand Session Timeout F0h 90h 2 Seconds 4-11
Decoding Preferences
Focus Mode F0h A6h Far Focus 5-5
Decoding Illumination F0h 2Ah Enable 5-6
Decode Aiming Pattern F0h 32h Enable 5-6
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC/AT& IBM PC Compatibles16-5
Country Types (Country Codes) North American 6-6
Ignore Unknown Characters Transmit 6-8
Keystroke Delay No Delay 6-8
Intra-Keystroke Delay Disable 6-9
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Disable 6-9
Caps Lock On Disable 6-10
Caps Lock Override Disable 6-10
1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideA-4
Convert Wedge Data No Convert 6-11
Function Key Mapping Disable 6-11
FN1 Substitution Disable 6-12
Send and Make Break Send 6-12
RS-232 Host Parameters
RS-232 Host Types Standard17-8
Baud Rate 9600 7-10
Parity Type None 7-11
Stop Bit Select 1 Stop Bit 7-12
Data Bits 8-Bit 7-12
Check Receive Errors Enable 7-13
Hardware Handshaking None 7-15
Software Handshaking None 7-16
Host Serial Response Time-out 2 Sec 7-17
RTS Line State Low RTS 7-18
Beep on <BEL> Disable 7-18
Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 7-19
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Normal Operation 7-20
Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 7-20
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation 8-5
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) North American 8-6
USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 8-8
USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 8-8
USB Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 8-9
Emulate Keypad Disable 8-9
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution Disable 8-10
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Standard Default Parameters A-5
Function Key Mapping Disable 8-10
Simulated Caps Lock Disable 8-11
Convert Case No Case Conversion 8-11
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address None Selected 9-5
Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 9-6
Wand Emulation Host Parameters
Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller110-5
Leading Margin 80 msec 10-6
Polarity Bar High/Margin Low 10-7
Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore 10-7
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 10-8
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable 10-9
Undecoded Scanner Emulation
Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit 11-6
Parameter Pass-Through Parameter Process and Pass Through 11-7
Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types 11-7
Module Width 20 µs 11-8
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert to Code 39 11-8
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 11-9
Transmission Timeout 3 seconds 11-9
Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters 11-10
Leading Margin 2 ms 11-11
Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED 11-12
123Scan Configuration Tool
123Scan Configuration None112-3
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideA-6
UPC/EAN
UPC-A 01h Enable 13-10
UPC-E 02h Enable 13-10
UPC-E1 0Ch Disable 13-11
EAN-8/JAN 8 04h Enable 13-11
EAN-13/JAN 13 03h Enable 13-12
Bookland EAN 53h Disable 13-12
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits) 10h Ignore 13-13
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 50h 10 13-14
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit 28h Enable 13-15
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit 29h Enable 13-15
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit 2Ah Enable 13-16
UPC-A Preamble 22h System Character 13-16
UPC-E Preamble 23h System Character 13-17
UPC-E1 Preamble 24h System Character 13-18
Convert UPC-E to A 25h Disable 13-18
Convert UPC-E1 to A 26h Disable 13-19
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend 27h Disable 13-19
UCC Coupon Extended Code 55h Disable 13-20
Code 128
Code 128 08h Enable 13-20
UCC/EAN-128 0Eh Enable 13-21
ISBT 128 54h Enable 13-21
Code 39
Code 39 00h Enable 13-22
Trioptic Code 39 0Dh Disable 13-22
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) 56h Disable 13-23
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Standard Default Parameters A-7
Code 32 Prefix E7h Disable 13-23
Set Length(s) for Code 39 12h 13h 2 to 55 13-24
Code 39 Check Digit Verification 30h Disable 13-25
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 2Bh Disable 13-26
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 11h Disable 13-26
Buffer Code 39 71h Disable 13-27
Code 93
Code 93 09h Disable 13-29
Set Length(s) for Code 93 1Ah 1Bh 4 to 55 13-30
Code 11
Code 11 0Ah Disable 13-31
Set Lengths for Code 11 1Ch 1Dh 4 to 55 13-32
Code 11 Check Digit Verification 34h Disable 13-33
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) 2Fh Disable 13-34
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 06h Enable 13-34
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 16h 17h 14 13-35
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 31h Disable 13-36
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit 2Ch Disable 13-37
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 52h Disable 13-37
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Discrete 2 of 5 05h Disable 13-38
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 14h 15h 12 13-38
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar 07h Disable 13-39
Set Lengths for Codabar 18h 19h 5 to 55 13-40
CLSI Editing 36h Disable 13-41
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideA-8
NOTIS Editing 37h Disable 13-41
MSI
MSI 0Bh Disable 13-42
Set Length(s) for MSI 1Eh 1Fh 1 to 55 13-42
MSI Check Digits 32h One 13-43
Transmit MSI Check Digit 2Eh Disable 13-44
MSI Check Digit Algorithm 33h Mod 10/Mod 10 13-44
Postal Codes
US Postnet 59h Enable 13-45
US Planet 5Ah Enable 13-45
UK Postal 5Bh Enable 13-46
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 60h Enable 13-46
Japan Postal F0h 22h Enable 13-47
Australian Postal F0h 23h Enable 13-47
Dutch Postal F0h 46h Enable 13-48
Transmit US Postal Check Digit 5Fh Enable 13-48
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology)
RSS 14 F0h 52h Enable 13-49
RSS Limited F0h 53h Enable 13-49
RSS Expanded F0h 54h Enable 13-50
Convert RSS to UPC/EAN F0h 8Dh Disable 13-50
Composite
Composite CC-C F0h 55h Disable 13-51
Composite CC-A/B F0h 56h Disable 13-51
Composite TLC-39 F0h 73h Disable 13-52
UPC Composite Mode F0h 58h Always Linked 13-53
Composite Beep Mode F0h 8Eh Beep As Each Code Type is Decoded 13-54
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Standard Default Parameters A-9
UCC/EAN Code 128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN
Composite Codes
F0h ABh Disable 13-54
2D Symbologies
PDF417 0Fh Enable 13-55
MicroPDF417 E3h Disable 13-55
Code 128 Emulation 7Bh Disable 13-56
Data Matrix F0h 24h Enable 13-57
Maxicode F0h 26h Enable 13-57
QR Code F0h 25h Enable 13-58
Symbology-Specific Security Levels
Redundancy Level 4Eh 1 13-59
Security Level 4Dh 0 13-61
Intercharacter Gap Size F0h 7Dh Normal 13-62
Report Version 13-62
Macro PDF
Flush Macro PDF Buffer 13-63
Abort Macro PDF Entry 13-63
Miscellaneous Scanner Options
Transmit Code ID Character 2Dh None 14-5
Prefix Value 63h, 69h 7013 <CR><LF> 14-6
Suffix 1 Value
Suffix 2 Value
62h, 68h
64h, 6Ah
7013 <CR><LF> 14-6
Scan Data Transmission Format EBh Data as is 14-7
FN1 Substitution Values 67h, 6Dh Set 14-8
Transmit “No Read” Message 5Eh Disable 14-9
Synapse Interface F0h ACh Standard 14-10
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number Default
Page
Number
1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideA-10
Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
AIM Code Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideB-2
Programming Reference B-3
Symbol Code Identifiers
Table B-1. Symbol Code Characters
Code Character Code Type
A UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, EAN-8, EAN-13
B Code 39, Code 32
C Codabar
D Code 128
E Code 93
F Interleaved 2 of 5
G Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA
H Code 11
JMSI
K UCC/EAN-128
L Bookland EAN
M Trioptic Code 39
N Coupon Code
R RSS Family
T UCC Composite, TLC 39
X PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
P00 Data Matrix
P01 QR Code
P02 Maxicode
P03 US Postnet
P04 US Planet
P05 Japan Postal
P06 UK Postal
P08 Dutch Postal
P09 Australian Postal
P09 UK Postal
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideB-4
AIM Code Identifiers
Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:
] = Flag Character (ASCII 93)
c = Code Character (see Table B-2)
m = Modifier Character (see Table B-3)
Table B-2. Aim Code Characters
Code Character Code Type
A Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32
C Code 128, Coupon (Code 128 portion)
d Data Matrix
E UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion)
e RSS Family
F Codabar
G Code 93
H Code 11
I Interleaved 2 of 5
L PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
MMSI
Q QR Code
S Discrete 2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5
UMaxicode
X Bookland EAN, Trioptic Code 39, US Postnet,
US Planet, UK Postal, Japan Postal, Australian
Postal, Dutch Postal
Programming Reference B-5
The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B-3.
Table B-3. Modifier Characters
Code Type Option Value Option
Code 39
0 No check character or Full ASCII processing.
1 Reader has checked one check character.
3 Reader has checked and stripped check character.
4 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion.
5 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked one check character.
7 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked and stripped check character.
Example: A Full ASCII bar code with check character W, A+I+MI+DW, is transmitted as ]A7AIMID where 7 = (3+4).
Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as ]X0412356
Code 128
0 Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position.
1 Function code 1 in first symbol character position.
2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position.
Example: A Code (EAN) 128 bar code with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first position, AIMID is transmitted as ]C1AIMID
I 2 of 5
0 No check digit processing.
1 Reader has validated check digit.
3 Reader has validated and stripped check digit.
Example: An I 2 of 5 bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I04123
Codabar
0 No check digit processing.
1 Reader has checked check digit.
3 Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.
Example: A Codabar bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F04123
Code 93 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0012345678905
MSI
0 Check digits are sent.
1 No check digit is sent.
Example: An MSI bar code 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as ]M14123
D 2 of 5 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123, is transmitted as ]S04123
UPC/EAN
0 Standard packet in full EAN country code format, which is 13 digits for UPC-A and UPC-E (not including
supplemental data).
1 Two-digit supplement data only.
2 Five-digit supplement data only.
4 EAN-8 data packet.
Example: A UPC-A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E00012345678905
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideB-6
Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X
Code 11
0 Single check digit
1 Two check digits
3 Check characters validated but not transmitted.
RSS Family
No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. RSS-14 and RSS-Limited transmit with an Application
Identifier “01”.
Note: In UCC/EAN-128 emulation mode, RSS is transmitted using Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1).
Example: An RSS-14 bar code 100123456788902 is transmitted as ]e001100123456788902.
EAN.UCC Composites
(RSS, UCC/EAN-128, 2D
portion of UPC
composite)
Native mode transmission.
Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
0 Standard data packet.
1 Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol separator character.
2 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character. The data packet does not
support the ECI protocol.
3 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character. The data packet supports the
ECI protocol.
UCC/EAN-128 emulation
Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
1 Data packet is a UCC/EAN-128 symbol (i.e., data is preceded with ]JC1).
PDF417, Micro PDF417
0 Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417 symbology specifications. Note: When this
option is transmitted, the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECIs have been invoked or whether
data byte 92DEC has been doubled in transmission.
1 Reader set to follow the ECI protocol (Extended Channel Interpretation). All data characters 92DEC are
doubled.
2 Reader set for Basic Channel operation (no escape character transmission protocol). Data characters 92DEC
are not doubled. Note: When decoders are set to this mode, unbuffered Macro symbols and symbols
requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape sequences cannot be transmitted.
3 The bar code contains a UCC/EAN-128 symbol, and the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915.
4 The bar code contains a UCC/EAN-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in the range 908-909.
5 The bar code contains a UCC/EAN-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in the range 910-911.
Example: A PDF417 bar code ABCD, with no transmission protocol enabled, is transmitted as ]L2ABCD.
Data Matrix
0 ECC 000-140, not supported.
1 ECC 200.
2 ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.
3 ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position.
4 ECC 200, ECI protocol implemented.
5 ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position, ECI protocol implemented.
6 ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position, ECI protocol implemented.
Table B-3. Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type Option Value Option
Programming Reference B-7
MaxiCode
0 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5.
1 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3.
2 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5, ECI protocol implemented.
3 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3, ECI protocol implemented in secondary message.
QR Code
0 Model 1 symbol.
1 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented.
2 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented.
3 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first position.
4 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in first position.
5 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in second position.
6 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in second position.
Table B-3. Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type Option Value Option
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideB-8
Sample Bar Codes
Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
UPC-A, 100 %. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
EAN-13, 100 %. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
RSS 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Data Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
QR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
US Postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
UK Postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideC-2
Sample Bar Codes C-3
Code 39
UPC/EAN
UPC-A, 100 %
EAN-13, 100 %
Code 128
123ABC
0
12
3
4
5
7
8
9
0
5
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
12
3
4
0
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideC-4
Interleaved 2 of 5
RSS 14
RSS 14 must be enabled to read the bar code below (see RSS-14 on page 13-49).
7612341562341
PDF417
Data Matrix
12345678901231
Note
Sample Bar Codes C-5
Maxicode
QR Code
US Postnet
UK Postal
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideC-6
Numeric Bar Codes
Numeric Bar Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Cancel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideD-2
Numeric Bar Codes D-3
Numeric Bar Codes
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s).
0
1
2
3
4
5
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideD-4
Numeric Bar Codes
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s).
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the bar code below.
6
7
8
9
Cancel
ASCII Character Sets
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideE-2
ASCII Character Sets E-3
Table E-1. ASCII Value Table
ASCII Value
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char Keystroke
1000 %U CTRL 2
1001 $A CTRL A
1002 $B CTRL B
1003 $C CTRL C
1004 $D CTRL D
1005 $E CTRL E
1006 $F CTRL F
1007 $G CTRL G
1008 $H CTRL H/BACKSPACE1
1009 $I CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1
1010 $J CTRL J
1011 $K CTRL K
1012 $L CTRL L
1013 $M CTRL M/ENTER1
1014 $N CTRL N
1015 $O CTRL O
1016 $P CTRL P
1017 $Q CTRL Q
1018 $R CTRL R
1019 $S CTRL S
1020 $T CTRL T
1021 $U CTRL U
1022 $V CTRL V
1023 $W CTRL W
1024 $X CTRL X
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke is sent.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideE-4
1025 $Y CTRL Y
1026 $Z CTRL Z
1027 %A CTRL [
1028 %B CTRL \
1029 %C CTRL ]
1030 %D CTRL 6
1031 %E CTRL -
1032 Space Space
1033 /A !
1034 /B “
1035 /C #
1036 /D $
1037 /E %
1038 /F &
1039 /G ‘
1040 /H (
1041 /I )
1042 /J *
1043 /K +
1044 /L ,
1045 - -
1046 . .
1047 /o /
1048 0 0
1049 1 1
1050 2 2
1051 3 3
Table E-1. ASCII Value Table (Continued)
ASCII Value
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char Keystroke
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke is sent.
ASCII Character Sets E-5
1052 4 4
1053 5 5
1054 6 6
1055 7 7
1056 8 8
1057 9 9
1058 /Z :
1059 %F ;
1060 %G <
1061 %H =
1062 %I >
1063 %J ?
1064 %V @
1065 A A
1066 B B
1067 C C
1068 D D
1069 E E
1070 F F
1071 G G
1072 H H
1073 I I
1074 J J
1075 K K
1076 L L
1077 M M
1078 N N
Table E-1. ASCII Value Table (Continued)
ASCII Value
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char Keystroke
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke is sent.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideE-6
1079 O O
1080 P P
1081 Q Q
1082 R R
1083 S S
1084 T T
1085 U U
1086 V V
1087 W W
1088 X X
1089 Y Y
1090 Z Z
1091 %K [
1092 %L \
1093 %M ]
1094 %N ^
1095 %O _
1096 %W ‘
1097 +A a
1098 +B b
1099 +C c
1100 +D d
1101 +E e
1102 +F f
1103 +G g
1104 +H h
1105 +I i
Table E-1. ASCII Value Table (Continued)
ASCII Value
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char Keystroke
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke is sent.
ASCII Character Sets E-7
1106 +J j
1107 +K k
1108 +L l
1109 +M m
1110 +N n
1111 +O o
1112 +P p
1113 +Q q
1114 +R r
1115 +S s
1116 +T t
1117 +U u
1118 +V v
1119 +W w
1120 +X x
1121 +Y y
1122 +Z z
1123 %P {
1124 %Q I
1125 %R }
1126 %S ~
Table E-1. ASCII Value Table (Continued)
ASCII Value
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char Keystroke
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke is sent.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideE-8
Table E-2. ALT Key Standard Default Tables
ALT Keys Keystroke
2064 ALT 2
2065 ALT A
2066 ALT B
2067 ALT C
2068 ALT D
2069 ALT E
2070 ALT F
2071 ALT G
2072 ALT H
2073 ALT I
2074 ALT J
2075 ALT K
2076 ALT L
2077 ALT M
2078 ALT N
2079 ALT O
2080 ALT P
2081 ALT Q
2082 ALT R
2083 ALT S
2084 ALT T
2085 ALT U
2086 ALT V
2087 ALT W
2088 ALT X
2089 ALT Y
2090 ALT Z
ASCII Character Sets E-9
Table 5-3. USB GUI Key Character Set
GUI Key Keystroke
3000 Right Control Key
3048 GUI 0
3049 GUI 1
3050 GUI 2
3051 GUI 3
3052 GUI 4
3053 GUI 5
3054 GUI 6
3055 GUI 7
3056 GUI 8
3057 GUI 9
3065 GUI A
3066 GUI B
3067 GUI C
3068 GUI D
3069 GUI E
3070 GUI F
3071 GUI G
3072 GUI H
3073 GUI I
3074 GUI J
3075 GUI K
3076 GUI L
3077 GUI M
3078 GUI N
3079 GUI O
3080 GUI P
3081 GUI Q
3082 GUI R
3083 GUI S
3084 GUI T
3085 GUI U
3086 GUI V
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar.
Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideE-10
3087 GUI W
3088 GUI X
3089 GUI Y
3090 GUI Z
Table E-4. PF Key Standard Default Table
PF Keys Keystroke
4001 PF 1
4002 PF 2
4003 PF 3
4004 PF 4
4005 PF 5
4006 PF 6
4007 PF 7
4008 PF 8
4009 PF 9
4010 PF 10
4011 PF 11
4012 PF 12
4013 PF 13
4014 PF 14
4015 PF 15
4016 PF 16
Table 5-3. USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Key Keystroke
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar.
Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
ASCII Character Sets E-11
Table E-5. F key Standard Default Table
F Keys Keystroke
5001 F 1
5002 F 2
5003 F 3
5004 F 4
5005 F 5
5006 F 6
5007 F 7
5008 F 8
5009 F 9
5010 F 10
5011 F 11
5012 F 12
5013 F 13
5014 F 14
5015 F 15
5016 F 16
5017 F 17
5018 F 18
5019 F 19
5020 F 20
5021 F 21
5022 F 22
5023 F 23
5024 F 24
Table E-6. Numeric Key Standard Default Table
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
6042 *
6043 +
6044 Undefined
6045 -
6046 .
6047 /
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideE-12
6048 0
6049 1
6050 2
6051 3
6052 4
6053 5
6054 6
6055 7
6056 8
6057 9
6058 Enter
6059 Num Lock
Table E-7. Extended Keypad Standard Default Table
Extended Keypad Keystroke
7001 Break
7002 Delete
7003 Pg Up
7004 End
7005 Pg Dn
7006 Pause
7007 Scroll Lock
7008 Backspace
7009 Tab
7010 Print Screen
7011 Insert
7012 Home
7013 Enter
7014 Escape
7015 Up Arrow
7016 Dn Arrow
7017 Left Arrow
7018 Right Arrow
Table E-6. Numeric Key Standard Default Table (Continued)
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
Glossary
AIM Automatic Identification Manufacturers, Inc. is the trade association for
manufacturers of automatic identification systems.
Alphanumeric A character set that contains letters, numbers and other characters such as
special symbols.
Aperture The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle that establishes
the field of view.
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
A 7-bit-plus-parity code representing 128 letters, numerals, punctuation marks,
and control characters. It is a standard data transmission code in the U.S.
Aspect Ratio The ratio of symbol height to symbol length in a 2-dimensional symbol.
Autodiscrimination The ability of an interface controller to determine the code type of a scanned
bar code. After this determination is made, the information content is decoded.
Automatic Identification System The application of various technologies, such as bar code recognition, image
recognition, voice recognition and RF/MW transponders, for the purpose of
data entry into a data processing system and bypassing the key-entry
component of traditional data entry.
Background The area surrounding a printed symbol including the spaces and quiet zones.
Bar The dark element in a printed bar code symbol.
Bar Code An array of parallel rectangular bars and spaces arranged according to the
encodation rules of a particular symbol specification in order to represent data
in machine-readable form (i.e., Code 39).
Bar Code Character A single group of bars and spaces which represent an individual number, letter,
punctuation mark or other symbol.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideGL-2
Bar Code Density The number of characters represented per unit of measurement (e.g.,
characters per inch).
Bar Code Reader A device used to read or decode a bar code symbol.
Bar Code Symbol The combination of symbol characters and features required by a particular
symbology, including quiet zones, start and stop characters, data characters,
check characters and other auxiliary patterns, that together form a complete
scannable entity (see symbol).
Bar Height The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar width.
or
The dimension of the individual bars in a bar code symbol or in a row of a multi-
row, 2-dimensional symbol that is measured perpendicular to the scanning
direction (see Y dimension).
Bar Width Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol start
character to the trailing edge of the same bar.
or
The transverse dimension of an individual bar in a bar code symbol that is
measured parallel to the scanning direction. The number of possible width
variations within a particular printed symbol depends on the symbology used
(see X dimension).
Baud Rate A measure of the data flow or number of signaling events occurring per second.
When one bit is the standard "event," this is a measure of bits per second (bps).
For example, a baud rate of 50 means transmission of 50 bits of data per
second.
Bi-directional Denotes that a machine-readable symbol can be read successfully in two
directions – either backwards or forwards. Also identifies a scanner that can
operate or a bar code that can be read independent of scanning direction.
Binary Denotes a numbering system to base 2 in which numbers are expressed as
combinations of the digits 0 and 1 with positional weighting based on powers
of 2. In computing, these can be represented electrically by 'off' and 'on'
respectively or in machine-readable symbols by narrow and wide elements or
by the absence or presence of a bar module.
Bit Binary digit. One bit is the basic unit of binary information. Generally, eight
consecutive bits compose one byte of data. The pattern of 0 and 1 values within
the byte determines its meaning.
Byte On an addressable boundary, eight adjacent binary digits (0 and 1) combined in
a pattern to represent a specific character or numeric value. Bits are numbered
from the right, 0 through 7, with bit 0 the low-order bit. One byte in memory is
used to store one ASCII character.
or
A sequential series of bits comprising one character and handled as one unit.
Usually encoded in the ASCII format, a byte usually consists of eight bits and
represents one alphabetic or special character, two decimal digits or eight
binary bits.
CDRH Center for Devices and Radiological Health. A federal agency responsible for
regulating laser product safety. This agency specifies various laser operation
classes based on power output during operation.
CDRH Class 1 This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification. This class is considered
intrinsically safe, even if all laser output were directed into the eye's pupil.
There are no special operating procedures for this class.
GL-3
CDRH Class 2 No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform to this limit. Laser
operation in this class poses no danger for unintentional direct human
exposure.
Character A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly represents data or indicates
a control function, such as a number, letter, punctuation mark, or
communications control contained in a message.
Character Set Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar code symbology.
Check Digit A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode. The scanner inserts the decoded
data into an arithmetic formula and checks that the resulting number matches
the encoded check digit. Check digits are required for UPC but are optional for
other symbologies. Using check digits decreases the chance of substitution
errors when a symbol is decoded.
Codabar A discrete self-checking code with a character set consisting of digits 0 to 9 and
six additional characters: ( - $ : / , +).
Code A set of unambiguous rules specifying the way in which data may be
represented as numbers and letters used to represent information (see number
system).
Code 128 A high density symbology which allows the controller to encode all 128 ASCII
characters without adding extra symbol elements.
Code 3 of 9 (Code 39) A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code symbology with a set of 43
character types, including all uppercase letters, numerals from 0 to 9, and 7
special characters (- . / + % $ and space). The code name is derived from the
fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character are wide, while the
remaining 6 are narrow.
Code 93 An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but offering a full character
ASCII set and a higher coding density than Code 39.
Code Length Number of data characters in a bar code between the start and stop characters,
not including those characters.
Codeword As a symbol character value, this isan intermediate level of coding between
source data and the graphical encodation in the symbol.
Concatination The construction of a string of data from two or more strings by appending each
string in succession. The linking or chaining together of separate items of data
in a bar code symbol or of the data contained in two or more separate bar code
symbols (also referred to as message append and structured append).
Continuous Code A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol are parts of
characters. There are no intercharacter gaps in a continuous code. The absence
of gaps allows for greater information density.
Contrast The difference in reflectance between the black and white (or bar and space)
areas of a symbol.
Data Identifier A specified character or string of characters that defines the intended use of
the data element that follows. For the purposes of automatic data capture
technologies, data identifier refers to the alphanumeric identifiers as defined
in ANSI MH10.8.2, formerly known as ANSI/FACT data identifiers.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideGL-4
Data Matrix This error correcting, 2-dimensional matrix symbology was originally developed
in 1989, and a finalized design was completed in 1995 by International Data
Matrix. It's capable of encoding various character sets including strictly
numeric data, alphanumeric data and all ISO 646 (ASCII) characters, as well as
special character sets. The symbology has both error detection and error
correction features. Each Data Matrix symbol consists of data regions, which
contain nominally square modules set out in a regular array. A dark module is
a binary 1 and a light module is a binary 0. There is no specified minimum or
maximum for the X or Y dimension. The data region is surrounded by a finder
pattern, a perimeter to the data region that is 1 module wide, which is
surrounded by a quiet zone on all four sides of the symbol. Two adjacent sides
are solid dark lines used primarily to define physical size, orientation and
symbol distortion. The two opposite sides consist of alternating dark and light
modules. These are used primarily to define the cell structure but also assist in
determining physical size and distortion. There are 2 types of Data Matrix
symbologies: ECC 000 - 140 with several available levels of convolutional error
correction, and ECC 200, which uses Reed-Solomon error correction. For ISO/
IEC JTC 1/SC 31 purposes, only ECC 200 is recommended. The intellectual
property rights associated with Data Matrix have been committed to the public
domain.
Data Structure The stipulation of the type of information that is included in a bar code, such as
its order and format.
Dead Zone An area within a scanner's field of view, in which specular reflection may
prevent a successful decode.
Decode To recognize a bar code symbology (e.g., UPC/EAN) and then analyze the
content of the specific bar code scanned.
Decode Algorithm A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data representation of the
letters or numbers encoded within a bar code symbol.
Decoder An electronic package that receives the signals from the scanning function,
performs the algorithm to interpret the signals into meaningful data and
provides the interface to other devices.
Depth of Field The range between minimum and maximum distances at which a scanner can
read a symbol with a certain minimum element width.
Diffuse Reflection The component of reflected light that emanates in all directions from the
reflecting surface.
Discrete 2 of 5 A binary bar code symbology representing each character by a group of five
bars, two of which are wide. The location of wide bars in the group determines
which character is encoded; spaces are insignificant. Only numeric characters
(0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.
Discrete Code A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between characters (intercharacter
gaps) are not part of the code.
EAN European Article Number. This European/International version of the UPC
provides its own coding format and symbology standards. Element dimensions
are specified metrically. EAN is used primarily in retail.
GL-5
EAN/U.P.C. A fixed-length, numeric 13-digit bar code symbol consisting of 30 dark
elements and 29 intervening light elements. Each character is represented by
2 bars and 2 spaces over 7 modules. A bar may be comprised of 1, 2, 3 or 4
modules. Each EAN/U.P.C. symbol consists of a leading quiet zone, a start
pattern, 7 left-hand data characters, a center bar pattern, 5 right-hand data
characters, a Modulo 10 check character, a stop pattern and a trailing quiet
zone. U.P.C. is often considered a 12-digit code. The 13th digit of EAN/U.P.C.
symbol is a derived character in the left-most position. In the case of U.P.C., this
derived left-most character is a 0.
Element Generic term for a bar or space.
Encoded Area Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code pattern, including
start/stop characters and data.
Error Correction A reader or decoder's use of mathematical schemes to reconstruct or replace
damaged or missing symbol characters to enable the reading of the symbol
data.
Error Detection This occurs when error-correction characters detect that the presence of errors
in the symbol exceeds the error correction capacity, and keeps the symbol from
being decoded as erroneous data.
Error-Correction Characters Symbol characters used for error correction and detection, calculated
automatically from the other symbol characters.
Error-Correction Level An indicator of the number of characters used in a symbology for error
correction. A higher level of error correction allows for correcting greater
potential symbol damage.
Error-Detection Characters Symbol characters reserved for error detection that are calculated
automatically from the other symbol characters.
Fixed Beam Bar Code Reader A scanning device where scanning motion is achieved by moving the object
relative to the reader; as opposed to a moving beam reader.
Guard Bars Bars located at both ends and the center of a UPC and EAN symbol to provide
reference points for scanning.
Horizontal Bar Code A bar code or symbol with an overall length dimension that is parallel to the
horizon, which resembles a picket fence.
Host Computer A computer that serves other terminals in a network, providing such services
as computation, database access, supervisory programs, and network control.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission. This international agency regulates
laser safety by specifying various laser operation classes based on power
output during operation.
IEC (825) Class 1 This is the lowest power IEC laser classification. Conformity is ensured through
a software restriction of 120 seconds of laser operation within any 1000 second
window and an automatic laser shutdown if the scanner's oscillating mirror
fails.
Intercharacter Gap The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a discrete code.
Interleaved 2 of 5 A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars
and five interleaved spaces. Interleaving provides for greater information
density. The location of wide elements (bar/spaces) within each group
determines which characters are encoded. This continuous code type uses no
intercharacter spaces. Only numeric (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may
be encoded.
Interleaved Bar Code A bar code in which characters are paired together, using bars to represent the
first character and the intervening spaces to represent the second.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideGL-6
LASER - Light Amplification by
Stimulated Emission of Radiation
The laser is an intense light source. Light from a laser is all the same frequency,
unlike the output of an incandescent bulb. Laser light is typically coherent and
has a high energy density.
Laser Diode A gallium-arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected to a power source
to generate a laser beam. This laser type is a compact source of coherent light.
Laser Scanner An optical bar code reading device using a coherent laser light beam as its
source of illumination.
LED Indicator A semiconductor diode (LED - Light Emitting Diode) used as an indicator, often
in digital displays. The semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce light of
a certain frequency determined by the semiconductor's particular chemical
composition.
Matrix Symbols A 2-dimensional array of regular polygon shaped cells where the center-to-
center distance of adjacent elements is uniform. The arrangement of the cells
represents data and/or symbology functions. Matrix symbols may include
recognition patterns that do not follow the same rule as the other elements
within the symbol (i.e., Data Matrix and MaxiCode).
MIL 1 mil = 1 thousandth of an inch; a unit of measure often used to quantify bar
code printing and scanning dimensions.
Misread (Misdecode) A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader or interface
controller does not agree with the data encoded within a bar code symbol.
Module (1) The narrowest nominal width unit of measure in a symbol. In certain
symbologies, element widths are specified as multiples of 1 module.
Equivalent to X dimension; or (2) a single cell in a matrix symbology used to
encode 1 bit of data. In MaxiCode, the module shape is a regular hexagon. In
Data Matrix, the module shape is nominally square. In PDF417, the module
shape is a regular rectangle. In bar code symbologies, the module shape is a
regular rectangle.
Module Check Digit or Character A character within the symbol data field calculated using modular arithmetic
that is used for error detection. The calculated character is determined by
applying a code algorithm to the data field contents (see check character).
Moving Beam Bar Code Reader A device where scanning motion is achieved by mechanically moving the
optical geometry.
MRD Minimum reflectance difference: a formula that is used to determine if there
is an adequate difference between absorbed and reflected light.
Nanometer Unit of measure used to define the wavelength of light that is equal to 10-9
meter.
Nominal The exact (or ideal) intended value for a specified parameter. Tolerances are
specified as positive and negative deviations from this value.
Nominal Size Standard size for a bar code symbol. Most UPC/EAN codes are used over a
range of magnifications (e.g., from 0.80 to 2.00 of nominal).
Non-Contact Reader/Scanner Bar code readers requiring no physical contact with the printed symbol.
Non-read The absence of data at the scanner output after an attempted scan, which is
due to no code, defective code, scanner failure or operator error.
Omnidirectional Bar codes read in any orientation relative to the scanner.
Optical Throw The distance from the scanner face to the closest point at which symbol can be
read; also, optical throw is the difference between range and depth of field.
GL-7
Orientation The alignment of the symbol's scan path. Two possible orientations are
horizontal with vertical bars and spaces (picket fence) and vertical with
horizontal bars and spaces (ladder).
Overhead The fixed number of characters required for start, stop and checking in a given
symbol. For example, a symbol requiring a start, stop and 2 check characters
contains 4 characters of overhead.
Parameter A variable that can have different values assigned to it.
PDF417 An error correcting 2-dimensional multi-row symbol developed in 1992 by
Symbol Technologies, PDF417 symbols are constructed from 4 bars and 4
spaces over 17 modules. The symbol size is from 3 to 90 rows. There is no
specified minimum or maximum for X or Y dimension. With at least the
recommended minimum level of error correction, the recommended Y
dimension is 3X. With less than the minimum recommended level of error
correction, the recommended Y dimension is 4X. A quiet zone of 2X is specified
on each side of a symbol. Because of delta decode techniques, the symbology
is immune from uniform bar width growth. PDF417 supports cross-row
scanning. The intellectual property rights associated with PDF417 have been
committed to the public domain.
Percent Decode The average probability that a single scan of a bar code would result in a
successful decode. In a well-designed bar code scanning system, that
probability should approach near 100%.
Pitch Rotation of a bar code symbol in an axis parallel to the direction of the bars.
Plessey Code A pulse-width, modulated bar code commonly used for shelf marking in grocery
stores.
Postnet Code Code developed by the U.S. Postal Service to assist in the automatic sorting of
mail.
Print Contrast Signal (PCS) Measurement of the contrast (brightness difference) between the bars and
spaces of a symbol. A minimum PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to
be scannable. PCS = (RL - RD) / RL, where RL is the reflectance factor of the
background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars.
Programming Mode The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter values. See
SCANNING MODE.
Quiet Zone A clear space, containing no dark marks, which precedes the start character of
a bar code symbol and follows the stop character.
Reflectance Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface.
Resolution The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished by a particular
reading device or printed with a particular device or method.
RSS Reduced Space Symbology: A family of space efficient symbologies developed
by UCC.EAN.
Scan Area Area intended to contain a symbol.
Scanner An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and produce a digitized
pattern that corresponds to the bars and spaces of the symbol. Its three main
components are:
1. Light source (laser or photoelectric cell) - illuminates a bar code.
2. Photodetector - registers the difference in reflected light (more light
reflected from spaces).
3. Signal conditioning circuit - transforms optical detector output into a
digitized bar pattern.
Scanning Mode The scanner is energized, programmed, and ready to read a bar code.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideGL-8
Scanning Sequence A method of programming or configuring parameters for a bar code reading
system by scanning bar code menus.
Self-Checking Code A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect encoding errors within
the characters of a bar code symbol.
Skew Rotation of a bar code symbol on an axis parallel to the symbol's length.
Space The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars.
Space Width The thickness of a space measured from the edge closest to the symbol start
character to the trailing edge of the same space.
Specular Reflection The mirror-like direct reflection of light from a surface, which can cause
difficulty decoding a bar code.
Stacked Symbol (2D Symbols) A 2-dimensional (2D) symbol with sequences of linear (width-coded) data that
are stacked one upon another (i.e., PDF417).
Start/Stop Character A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with start and stop
reading instructions and scanning direction. The start and stop characters are
normally to the left and right margins of a horizontal code.
Substrate A foundation material on which a substance or image is placed.
Symbol A scannable unit that encodes data within the conventions of a certain
symbology, usually including start/stop characters, quiet zones, data
characters, and check characters.
Symbol Aspect Ratio The ratio of symbol height to symbol width.
Symbol Density The number of data characters per unit length; usually expressed as characters
per inch (CPI).
Symbol Height The distance between the outside edges of the quiet zones of the first row and
the last row.
Symbol Length Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet zone (margin)
adjacent to the start character to the end of the quiet zone (margin) adjacent
to a stop character.
Symbology The structural rules and conventions for representing data within a particular
bar code type (e.g. UPC/EAN, Code 39).
Tilt Rotation of a bar code symbol on an axis perpendicular to the substrate.
Tolerance Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width.
Two-dimensional symbology A machine-readable symbol which must be examined both vertically and
horizontally to read the entire message.
A 2-dimensional (2D) symbol may be one of two types of machine-readable
symbols: a Matrix Symbol or a stacked symbol. 2D symbols differ from linear
bar codes with the ability for high data content, small size, data efficiency and
error correction capability.
UCC Uniform Code Council: the organization that administers the U.P.C and other
retail standards.
UCC.EAN-128 Code 128 with a Function 1 character in the first position that is the symbology
used with the UCC.EAN format for a universal product number (UPN).
UPC Universal Product Code. A relatively complex numeric symbology. Each
character consists of two bars and two spaces, each of which is any of four
widths. The standard symbology for retail food packages in the United States.
Variable Length Code A code with a number of encoded characters within a range, as opposed to a
code with a fixed number of encoded characters.
GL-9
Vertical Bar Code A bar code pattern presented in such orientation that the symbol from start to
stop is perpendicular to the horizon. The individual bars are in an array
appearing as rungs of a ladder.
Visible Laser Diode (VLD) A solid state device which produces visible laser light.
Wand Scanner A handheld scanning device used as a contact bar code or OCR reader.
Wedge A device that plugs in between a keyboard and a terminal and allows data to
be entered by a keyboard or by various types of scanners.
X Dimension The dimension of the narrowest bar and narrowest space in a bar code.
Y Dimension The height of the modules in a row of a 2-dimensional (2D) symbols.
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideGL-10
Numerics
123Scan parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
2D bar codes
code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-56
Data Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-57
Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-57
MicroPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-55
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-55
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-58
A
actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-4
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3
actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3, 15-27
move cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-31
send data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-27
setup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-30
alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-90
alternate rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
bar code menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-4
beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-46
code lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-17
code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11
criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3, 15-11
default rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-7
move cursor past a character . . . . . . . . . . . .15-30
move cursor to a character . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-30
move cursor to start of data . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-30
numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-24, 15-25
pad spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-37
pad zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-41
rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
rules hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
send alt characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-65
send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
send function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-75
send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-51
send keypad characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-70
send preset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
send value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
skip ahead characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32
skip ahead "n" characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
skip back characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33
skip back "n" characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
space removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-36
special commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
specific data string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
specific string
any location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
any message ok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
rule belongs to set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
turn off rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-88, 15-89
zero removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-36
advanced data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3, 15-27
alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-90
alternate rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
bar code menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
code lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Index
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideIN-2
code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11
criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3, 15-11
default rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-7
numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-24, 15-25
pad spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-37
pad zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-41
rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3
rules hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
send alt characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-65
send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-46
send function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-75
send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-51
send keypad characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-70
send preset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-35
setup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-30
skip ahead characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-32
skip back characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-33
space removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-36
special commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
specific data string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-22
turn off rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-88, 15-89
zero removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-36
aiming options
decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 2-7
aiming tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
ASCII values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-3
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
B
bar codes
123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
beep style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12
cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
check for decode LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-56
code 39
transmit buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-28
code 39 full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-51
composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-51
composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-52
convert bar codes to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
convert newer code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
Data Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-57
data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
pause duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . .14-5
decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
decode session timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
digital scanner
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
discrete 2 of 5
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
flush macro buffer/abort macro PDF entry . 13-63
focus mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
IBM 468X/469X
convert unkown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
ignore unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-35, 13-36
keyboard wedge
alternate numeric keypad emulation . . . 6-9
caps lock on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
capsl ock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
country keyboard types (country codes) . 6-6
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
ignore unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
intra-keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
leading margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
MicroPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-55
miscellaneous
scan data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
transmit no read msg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
module width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
numeric bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
parameter pass-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
parameter scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-55
postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58
RS-232
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . .7-14, 7-15
host serial response time-out . . . . . . . . 7-17
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
stop bit select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
scanner emulation
Index IN-3
beep style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
check for decode LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
code 39 full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . 11-9
convert bar codes to code 39 . . . . . . . . 11-8
convert newer code types . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
ignore unknown characters . . . . . . . . 11-10
leading margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
module width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
parameter pass-through . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
transmission timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
scanner emulation host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
scanstand session timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
symbologies
Australian postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
codabar CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
codabar lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
codabar NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
code 11 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20, 13-21
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
code 39 check digit verification . . . . . 13-25
code 39 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
code 39 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
code 39 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . 13-26
code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
code 93 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30, 13-31
convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
discrete 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
Dutch postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
EAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
I 2 of 5 check digit verification . . . . . . 13-36
I 2 of 5 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . 13-37
I 2 of 5 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . 13-37
Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
MSI check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
MSI check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43
MSI lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42, 13-43
MSI transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . 13-46
transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . 13-48
UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . 13-20
UCC/EAN-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
UPC-A/E/E1 check digit . . . . . 13-15, 13-16
UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
time delay to low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
timeout between decodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
transmission timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-53
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
UPC/EAN
coupon code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20
supp redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14
UPC/EAN/JAN
supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . .13-14
USB
caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
country keyboard types . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
wand emulation
code 39 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
convert all bar codes to code 39 . . . . . .10-8
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
leading margin (quiet zone) . . . . . . . . . .10-6
polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
beeper
definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
setting tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
setting volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
C
cables
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
removing cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-3
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
codabar bar codes
CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-41
codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-39
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-40
NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-41
code 11 bar codes
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-31
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-32
code 128 bar codes
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20, 13-21
UCC/EAN-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-21
code 128 emulation bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-56
code 39 bar codes
buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-27
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-25
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideIN-4
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-22
full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-26
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-24
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-26
code 93 bar codes
code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-29
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30, 13-31
code identifiers
AIM code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
modifier characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
code types
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11
composite bar codes
composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-51
composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-51
composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-52
UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-53
connecting
IBM 468X/469X interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
scanner emulation interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
synapse cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
wand emulation interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
D
Data Matrix bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-57
decode zones
far focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
near focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
toggled focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
default parameters
IBM 468X/469X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
miscellaneous scanner options . . . . . . . . . . .14-4
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-4
standard default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 5-4
wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
digital scanner
defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
discrete 2 of 5 bar codes
discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-38
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-38
E
exposure options
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
F
focus mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
H
host types
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
I
IBM 468X/469X
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
intellistand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
K
keyboard wedge
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
L
LED definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
M
macro PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-63
flush buffer/abort PDF entry . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-63
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Maxicode bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
MicroPDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-55
miscellaneous scanner parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
mounting
intellistand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
MSI bar codes
check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-42, 13-43
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
N
notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
P
parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
PDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-55
pinouts
scanner signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
postal codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
Index IN-5
Austalian postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
Dutch postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
time delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Q
QR code bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58
quiet zone (leading margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
R
RS-232
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6, 7-8
RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-49
Convert RSS to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
S
sample bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
scanner emulation connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
scanner emulation default parameters . . . . . . . . . 11-4
scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 5-3, 13-5, 14-3
hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
hands-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
sequence example . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 5-3, 13-5, 14-3
setup
connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
connecting keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . 6-3
connecting power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
connecting to an IBM 468X/469X host . . . . . . 9-3
connecting using scanner emulation . . . . . . . 11-3
connecting using wand emulation . . . . . . . . . 10-3
installing the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
standard default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3
symbology default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
synapse cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
T
technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
U
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
UPC/EAN bar codes
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12
check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15, 13-16
convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-18
convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-19
EAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-19
EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12
EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-13
UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-16
UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-17
UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
USB
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
user preferences parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 5-4
W
wand emulation
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
DS 3408 Product Reference GuideIN-6
Thank you for your input—We value your comments.
Tell Us What You Think...
We’d like to know what you think about this Manual. Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form
to: (631) 738-3318, or mail to:
Symbol Technologies, Inc.
One Symbol Plaza M/S B-4
Holtsville, NY 11742-1300
Attention: Technical Publications Manager
IMPORTANT: If you need product support, please call the appropriate customer support number provided. Unfortunately,
we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above.
Manual Title:___________________________________________
(please include revision level)
How familiar were you with this product before using this manual?
Did this manual meet your needs? If not, please explain.
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
What topics need to be added to the index, if applicable?
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
What topics do you feel need to be better discussed? Please be specific.
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
What can we do to further improve our manuals?
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
Very familiar Slightly familiar Not at all familiar
72-68456-01
Revision A — July 2004

Navigation menu